JP5141864B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) in which, for example, a low probability of “1/200” or less is adopted as the winning probability of jackpot.

  As this type of gaming machine, for example, a pachinko machine described in Patent Document 1 is known. That is, the pachinko machine described in Patent Document 1 has a game board in which a game area is formed, and when a game ball is driven toward the game area, the game ball that is driven into the game area is played by the game. It flows down along the board. In this game area, a large number of obstacle nails having a predetermined gauge arrangement, a start opening for a game ball driven toward the game area, and a probability of a game ball entering the start opening are increased. A movable member that can be operated as described above is provided.

  Further, in the pachinko machine, a lottery process for winning a jackpot is performed based on the control data stored in the data memory in response to the winning of a game ball at the start opening. The result of the lottery process is derived as a stop symbol after a variable display effect is performed on a plurality of image symbols on a liquid crystal display, for example. If the result of the lottery process is a big hit, a big hit game for giving a predetermined amount of game balls as a prize to the player is performed.

  Further, depending on the winning type of the jackpot, after such a jackpot game is performed, the setting time is changed to a longer operating time when the movable member operates. In addition, the setting change is made to a higher probability (for example, “1/60”) of the jackpot winning probability (advantageous gaming state). In this advantageous gaming state, the probability that a game ball that has been driven into the game area will enter the starting port is increased, and the jackpot is likely to be won. .

  By the way, when transitioning to such an advantageous gaming state, not only will the game balls enter the start opening one after another (easily), but also the relatively early stage due to the high probability of winning. The above jackpot is often won. Therefore, when in this advantageous gaming state, there is often a case where it is not won a big hit even though it took a long time to derive the result of the lottery process on the liquid crystal display. The player cannot fully realize (enjoy) the merits (high winning probability, improvement of the lottery efficiency, etc.) in the advantageous gaming state, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the case of a pachinko machine, when the big hit is not won in the advantageous gaming state, the execution of an effect (such as a so-called reach effect) with a high expectation degree of winning the big win is refrained from being executed. In addition, by changing the setting of the time (variation time) required until the result of the lottery process is derived to the liquid crystal display to a shorter time, the next lottery process is performed after the lottery process is performed. Time is shortened (improves lottery efficiency) appropriately.
JP 2006-319661 A

  In the above conventional pachinko machine, when the jackpot is not won, the execution of the production having high expectation of winning the jackpot (so-called reach production etc.) is refrained and the setting time is changed to a shorter time of the fluctuation. Therefore, the above-described lottery efficiency in the advantageous gaming state is surely improved.

  However, even in the case of shifting to such an advantageous gaming state, if the luck is bad, many lottery processes must be performed before the jackpot is won. That is, in this case, in the liquid crystal display, under the situation where the change time is changed to a shorter time, an effect with a low expectation of winning the jackpot is indifferently performed, and the player However, even though the game state is advantageous to the player, it is unpleasant that such a low-expected performance is indifferently performed, and the interest of the game is lowered.

  This invention is made in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress the fall of the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve such an object, the invention according to claim 1 accepts a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball is driven toward the game area, and a game ball that is driven toward the game area. An opening / closing device capable of opening and closing between a difficult closed state and an open state in which a game ball can be received more easily than the closed state, a start opening provided in the game area, and a game driven toward the game area A movable member operable to increase a probability of entering a ball into the start port, and a first jackpot and a first jackpot according to the game ball entering the start port In addition, the lottery processing for the jackpot including the second jackpot that is advantageous to the player is included in the winning type. To be done Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the lottery process performed, special game execution means for performing a jackpot game in which the opening / closing device is opened and closed, and when the first jackpot is won, the second jackpot is won. As long as the player is in a normal gaming state that has not yet been won, the first state control means for controlling the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning is executed to the normal gaming state, and the second jackpot Is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning is executed is changed to a longer operating time than when the movable member is operating in the normal gaming state. A second state control means for controlling to a chance gaming state and a result of the lottery process performed by releasing the hold state can be recognized In addition to the special symbol display in which special symbols are variably displayed and the special symbol display, a plurality of image symbols are variably displayed so that the result of the lottery process is suggested to the player. An effect image display device having a display surface, and a display control means for performing effect control related to a variable display effect for the plurality of image symbols when the lottery process is performed, the display control means, In performing the effect control related to the variable display effect for a plurality of image symbols, the winning determination means for determining whether or not the jackpot is won in the lottery process, and the winning jackpot is not won by the winning determination means When the determination is made, the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect having a higher degree of expectation of winning the jackpot than the first variable display effect are used. The number of lottery processes that are put on hold when it is determined that the first variation display effect should be performed by the effect content determining means for determining whether or not the effect control should be performed, and the effect content determining means. And performing the first variation display effect so that the time required for the variation display effect for the plurality of image symbols is shortened when the determined number of processes is larger than when the number of processes is small. Whether the normal game state or the chance game state is in effect when it is determined by the means and the effect content determination means that the second variable display effect with high expectation of winning the jackpot is to be performed And in the normal gaming state, the second variation always takes longer than when it is determined that the first variable display effect should be performed. While performing the dynamic display effect, in the chance game state, the second variable display effect is not necessarily performed for a longer time than when it is determined that the first variable display effect should be performed. Special fluctuation executing means, and when the number of lottery processes that are put on hold is large, the normal fluctuation executing means takes time required for the variable display effects for the plurality of image symbols. It has a high-speed effect control execution means for performing the first variable display effect in a shortened variable display mode that is less than “½” when the number of lottery processes is small, and at least in the chance game state The high-speed effect control execution means performs the effect control, and the special change execution means takes a longer time than the time required for the first change display effect. In addition to the first special variation execution means which suggests to the player that the winning degree of winning the jackpot is higher than the first variation display effect by performing the variation display effect of the first variation display effect. A second special variation executing means for performing the second variable display effect in a time shorter than the time required for the display effect; and in the chance gaming state, the second special variation executing means. The effect control is performed so that the second probability that the second variation display effect is performed is higher by the second special variation execution means than the first probability that the variable display effect is performed. Yes, the second special variation executing means may display the special symbol on the special symbol display only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. , When the number of lottery processes in the holding state is small by performing the effect control such that the plurality of image symbols are subjected to the variable display effect in the shortened variable display mode a plurality of times, the normal It suggests to the player that the winning expectation to the jackpot is higher than the first variation display effect, although the time is shorter than the time required for the first variation display effect performed by the variation execution means. In summary, the second variation display effect is performed.

  That is, in the chance gaming state where the operation time when the movable member is operated is changed to the operation time longer than that in the normal gaming state (a state in which the so-called open extension function is enabled), the winning of the jackpot As the probability, a high probability advantageous to the player is adopted, and the lottery process related to the jackpot is often performed. However, as described above, even if the game is shifted to such a chance game state, if the player is unlucky, many lottery processes must be performed before the jackpot is won. In this case, in the effect image display device such as a liquid crystal display, if only the effect with a low expectation of winning the jackpot is repeatedly performed, the player is in an advantageous gaming state. No, it is unpleasant that such a low-expected performance is performed indifferently, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  Therefore, in such a chance game state, it is also possible to perform a variable display effect (such as a reach effect) that requires a long time at the same frequency as in the normal game state even though the jackpot is not won. It is done. However, in this case, the time required from the lottery process to the next lottery process cannot be shortened, and the player can fully benefit from the chance gaming state (high lottery efficiency, etc.). It becomes impossible to feel (enjoy). In particular, this is a problem that cannot be ignored for a player who wants to avoid a decrease in the number of possessed balls by temporarily stopping the game balls from being placed in the game area during the period in which the variable display effect is performed.

  That is, the above-mentioned movable member often operates only when a game ball is continuously driven into the game area, and the game ball that has been temporarily stopped after a variable display effect requiring a long time is performed. Even if the operation is resumed, a predetermined waiting time is required until the movable member operates. And during this waiting time, a player cannot enjoy the merit by having made the above-mentioned opening extension function effective. After that, when the movable member is operated, a variable display effect corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the start opening is performed, and the game ball is not driven again into the game area. Such a player can hardly enjoy the merits of the above-described opening extension function being effective.

  In this regard, in the configuration described above, when performing the first variable display effect with a low expectation of winning the jackpot in the chance game state, determining the number of lottery processes that are in the hold state. did. As a result, when the number of the lottery processes is large, the time required for the variable display effect for a plurality of image symbols is shortened to be less than “½” when the number of lottery processes is small. In the aspect, the first variation display effect is performed (normal variation execution means). As a result, the time required from the lottery process to the next lottery process is greatly reduced, and the above-described lottery efficiency in the chance gaming state can be appropriately improved. become.

  Then, after adopting such a shortened variation display mode, the first variation display effect is performed by performing the second variation display effect over a longer time than the time required for the first variation display effect. In addition to the first special variation execution means that suggests to the player that the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the performance, the second time is shorter than the time required for the first variation display effect. A second special variation execution means for performing a variable display effect; and in the chance gaming state, the first special variation execution means performs the second variable display effect more than a first probability that the second variable display effect is performed. The effect control is performed such that the second probability that the second variation display effect is performed by the second special variation executing means is higher.

  That is, when the above-described shortened variation display mode is adopted, even if a plurality of image designs are subjected to a variation display effect, for example, the first for the first time performed when the number of lottery processes is small. It is possible to shorten the time required for the variable display effect. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation is high by causing a plurality of image designs to be subjected to variable display effects in the shortened variable display mode. In this regard, the second special variation executing means is configured so that the special symbol display is variably displayed only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. The number of lottery processes in the on-hold state by performing the effect control so that the plurality of image symbols are subjected to a variable display effect over a plurality of times (for example, twice) in the shortened variable display mode. The expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the first variation display effect, while the time is shorter than the time required for the first variation display effect performed by the normal variation execution means when there is little The second variation display effect is performed while suggesting to the player. And, when the second variation display effect is performed in the chance game state, since the second special variation execution means is positively adopted, while performing the highly expected effect with high frequency, The time required from the time when the lottery process is performed until the next lottery process is performed can be greatly reduced, and the above-described lottery efficiency in the chance gaming state can be appropriately improved. Become.

  In addition, according to the second special variation execution means, even if the second variation display effect with high expectation for the jackpot is performed with the same frequency as when in the normal gaming state, The time required from the lottery process to the next lottery process can be reduced. For this reason, in the effect image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to avoid only the first variable display effect having a low expectation of winning the jackpot, thereby preventing the chance game state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed before the jackpot is won, the interest of the game is favorably maintained.

  Note that the variable display effect for a plurality of image symbols is, for example, an effect that displays a plurality of image symbols in a plurality of columns (for example, three columns of “left column”, “center column”, and “right column”). That means.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is closed with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine.

  1 and 2, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be mounted with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. The main body frame 3, a glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is to be driven, and the glass The door frame 5 includes a tray unit 300 that is disposed below the unit 190 and receives a prize ball generated as a result of a game and supplies the prize ball to the launch position of the launch rail 38.

  A lower decorative plate 6 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 6a is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Although not shown in detail, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower wooden upper frames. The plate and the lower frame plate and the left and right light alloy (aluminum) side frame plates are assembled in a rectangular shape by connecting them with connecting members for connecting the respective end portions. An upper support bracket 47 and a lower shaft support fixed to the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 are attached to an upper support bracket 7 provided on the upper portion of the outer frame 2 and a lower support bracket 8 provided on one upper surface of the lower decorative plate 6. By engaging the metal fitting 48, the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed.

  Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 4, a prize ball tank 50 for delivering a prize ball to the back surface thereof, a tank rail member 51, a ball passage unit 52, and a ball payout device (ball payout unit) 53 are attached, and the launching device 57 and the electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the game board 4 are controlled at the lower back side thereof. A substrate unit 54 on which various control boards, power supply boards 395 (see FIG. 22) and the like are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 58 that covers the rear opening 70 (see FIG. 7) of the main body frame 3 is attached. Is detachably provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle unit 318 in the above-described dish unit 300. In addition, there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle unit 318 that is conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, and thus the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front.

[About the body frame]
First, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and includes a launching device 57, a prize ball tank 50, a tank rail member 51, a ball path unit 52, and a ball payout device 53 for paying out a prize ball. A locking device 60 that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, and various types for controlling electrical components provided on the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except for the game board 4. The main body frame 3 on which various components such as the board unit 54 on which the control board, the power supply board and the like are collectively provided and the cover body 58 covering the rear opening 70 are mounted will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. I will explain. 4 and 5 are as described above, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the main body frame.

  The configuration of the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is attached will be described. The main body frame 3 is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2. An upper shaft support bracket 47 and a lower shaft support bracket 48 are attached to support the opening and closing shaft. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 by being engaged with the upper support bracket 7 and the lower support bracket 8 attached to the outer frame 2 with the shaft support brackets 47 and 48, respectively. .

  By the way, when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 6, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 30 for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 30 is a plate portion 32. In order to form a space for the game board installation recess 30, side walls 290 to 293, which will be described later, protrude rearward from the game board installation recess 30, and in a space surrounded by the side walls 290 to 293, The rear protruding portions of various components such as the game board 4 and an effect display device provided on the game board 4 are accommodated.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front right side, and front left side surrounding the game board installation recess 30 have an upper side, a middle part, and a lower side of the front right side that are the open side. A hook opening 36 for opening a door frame hook portion 61 provided in a locking device 60 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 and projecting forward is provided, and is on the side of the shaft support. A board positioning projection 37 for engaging with a positioning recess 466 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front left side part.

  Next, a description will be given of the configuration on the front side of the main body frame 3 and provided on the plate portion 32 positioned below the game board installation recess 30. As shown in FIG. The firing rail 38 is fixed by screws toward the end on the open side. A rail connection member 44 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 32 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 38, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 30, the outer rail unit of the game board 4 is provided. The connecting passage portion 477 which is the downstream end of 472 is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 477. An elliptical game board fixture 46 for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is rotatably attached to a side position of the rail connection member 44 (position opposite to the firing rail 38). The game board fixing tool 46 is rotated clockwise in a state where the game board 4 is placed in the game board installation recess 30 to press the game board fixing tool 46 against the front surface of the game board 4 to play the game board 4. Is fixed. On the other hand, when the game board 4 is removed, the lower part of the game board 4 can be easily released by turning the game board fixture 46 counterclockwise. Further, a prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided on the side of the game board fixture 46 on the side of the shaft support. The prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided in the middle of the prize ball path for paying out the prize balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. When the door frame 5 is opened. The prize ball passage is automatically closed to prevent the balls from spilling out from the prize ball passage, while when the door frame 5 is closed, the prize ball passage is automatically communicated and paid out from the ball dispensing device 53. The awarded ball is paid out to the dish unit 300. A fastening hole 41 for fastening with a fastening portion (not shown) and a fastening portion 469 formed on the game board 4 is formed in the plate portion 32 above the firing position of the firing rail 38.

  Moreover, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 32 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 40 projecting in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A launching device 57 is fixed to the mounting portion 40 from the back surface of the main body frame 3. In addition, a handle connection window 40a into which a slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 (see FIG. 1) of the slide unit 230 attached to the rear surface side of the door frame 5 is inserted is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 40, and the door is formed. When the frame 5 is closed, a slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 to be described later is inserted into the handle connection window 40a, and the handle unit 318 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device 57 are linked together to rotate the handle unit 318. It is possible to adjust the resilience of the launching device 57 with a strength corresponding to the amount of dynamic operation, so that the ball at the launching position of the launching rail 38 is ejected and a desired position in the game area 20 is obtained. Can be launched.

  The front structure of the main body frame 3 is generally as described above. Next, the back surface structure of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, a prize ball tank 50 for storing a ball for paying out as a prize ball or a rental ball is detachably mounted on the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. A tank rail member 51 that guides the balls from the prize ball tank 50 in a laterally inclined manner is disposed, and further, a ball passage unit 52 and a ball dispensing device 53 are provided downward from the lower end of the tank rail member 51. The tank rail member 51 guides the balls from the prize ball tank 50 to the downstream side while aligning them in two rows in the front-rear direction, and the sphere moves from the downstream end of the tank rail member 51 to the ball path unit 52. At this time, the ball passage unit 52 falls in a row. The balls guided from the ball path unit 52 to the ball payout device 53 are in accordance with a payout control program executed by a payout control board 720 (see FIG. 22) housed in a payout control board box 55 described below. A predetermined number of award balls and rental balls are paid out, and the discharged balls are discharged to a dish unit 300 provided on the front side of the door frame 5. Although not shown in detail, the ball payout device 53 is provided with a payout motor and a rotary payout member that is rotationally driven by the payout motor and pays out the balls one by one.

  Furthermore, a substrate unit 54 is attached to the lower surface of the back surface of the main body frame 3. The board unit 54 has a game board 4 such as a payout control board box 55, an external terminal board 56, and a power supply board box (not shown, but fixed to the back side of the payout control board box 55 and the external terminal board 56). Substrate boxes that are not provided in the above are collectively provided. That is, the board boxes for storing the control boards that do not need to be exchanged even when the game board 4 is exchanged are collectively provided. Then, when the game board 4 is stored and installed in the game board installation recess 30, the main control board provided on the game board 4 side and the board provided on the board unit 54, which need to be connected to the main control board, The electrical connection is automatically performed. A unitized launching device 57 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 40 below the substrate unit 54 described above. Further, a cover body 58 is provided in the rear opening 70 formed along the rear end of the side wall 290 to 293 described above of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. The cover body 58 covers the entire area of the rear part of the game board 4, and when the cover body 58 is attached and closed, as shown in FIG. The tank rail member 51 is formed to have substantially the same vertical plane as the rear end portion.

  A locking device 60 is fixed to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3. The locking device 60 is a so-called W-lock that locks both the outer frame 2 of the main body frame 3 and the main frame 3 of the door frame 5. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of door frame hooks 61 and cylinder locks 62 (both see FIG. 1) are provided so as to protrude forward.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 30 is demonstrated. FIG. 7 is a side view of the main body frame before the parts are attached, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the main body frame to which the parts are attached as viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the gaming board installation recess 30 has a front side face part that does not accommodate the game board 4 in the upper side part and a part of the open side, and the upper side face part. Although nothing is formed in the open side, hook openings 36 through which the door frame hook portion 61 of the locking device 60 penetrates are formed in three places, upper, middle and lower, on the open side surface portion. That is, the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the open side flange portion (see FIG. 4).

  Thus, the game board installation recess 30 includes a first side wall 290 provided around the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the upper side portion and the open side surface portion on the open side, and a rear side from the first side wall 290. A second side wall 291 arranged around, a third side wall 292 arranged around the rear from the second side wall 291, a fourth side wall 293 arranged around the rear from the third side wall 292, Thus, the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 and the rear part of the upper side are formed in a concave shape. The first side wall 290 to the fourth side wall 293 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended backward with a step when viewed from the rear side, whereas the left side ( A side (open side) is formed in a step shape (see FIG. 5) that is inclined inwardly from the first side wall 290 toward the fourth side wall 293. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 293 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 290 to the fourth side wall 293 on the left side (open side) are straightly formed rearward. May come into contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate of the outer frame 2 and may not be opened smoothly, so that the first side wall 290 to the fourth side wall 293 on the open side are smoothly opened by being inclined inward. It is something that can be done. At the same time, the locking device 60 is attached along the first side wall 290 on the open side, but the attachment is performed using a lock attachment hole (not shown) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 290. In order to form the lock mounting hole (not shown), the fourth side wall 293 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 290 on the open side. Furthermore, the step size of the first side wall 290 to the fourth side wall 293 also needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 because the step between the first side wall 290 and the second side wall 291 is required. It is formed with a large level difference, but the other level differences are extremely small.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the side walls 290 to 293 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 90 mm. . In particular, the width d1 of the first side wall 290 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 291, third side wall 292, and fourth side wall 293. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided at 4 are accommodated. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as will be described below, the second side wall 291, the third side wall 292, and the fourth side wall 293 are formed to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space is secured, for example, even when an effect display device 115 or the like that occupies almost the entire area of the game board 4 is attached, the rearward projecting portions of such various parts are easily stored. Is something that can be done.

  Further, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 293, a left rear wall 294, an upper rear wall 295, and a right rear wall 296 project inward from the left side, the upper side, and the right side as viewed from the back. . The right rear wall 296 has a flat front surface, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are detachably attached to the rear surface of the right rear wall 296. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the protruding width to the inside of the right rear wall 296 to have a width for attaching the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53. Further, the upper rear wall 295 has a flat front surface, and the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear surface of the upper rear wall 295, so that the lower end side is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 295 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 51 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the right rear wall 296 has a flat plate shape, and a cover body supporting cylinder portion 280 that pivotally supports the cover body 58 is formed on the rear surface. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the right rear wall 296 to have a width dimension that forms the cover body supporting cylinder portion 280.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the left rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the right rear wall 296 that protrude inward from the rear edge of the fourth side wall 293 are formed in a flat plate shape, and this flat plate portion Corresponds to the peripheral part of the game board 4, and as described above, the second side wall 291, the third side wall 292, and the fourth side wall 293 reach the position corresponding to the peripheral part of the game board 4. Since the size of the space to be formed is secured, for example, even in the case where an effect display device 115 or the like that occupies almost the entire area of the game board 4 is attached, the rear projecting portion by such various parts is not provided. It can be stored easily. The inside of the left rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the right rear wall 296 is a rear opening 70 so that the rear opening 70 can be opened and closed by a cover body 58 (see FIG. 4). It has become.

[About the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. 9 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame body 100 formed in a square shape, and a door lens unit around the front surface of the gaming window 101. 120 is attached, and a plate unit 300 is provided in the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and a handle unit 318 is protruded and fixed to one side (open side) of the plate unit 300. Has been. In addition, a reinforcing sheet metal 160 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 190 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. The slide unit 230 corresponding to the handle unit 318, the mounting base 220, and the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 are attached to the back surface of the frame. A security cover 210 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 190.

  The door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape from a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed in the upper part, and the lower part of the gaming window 101 is a plate-like part. Circular speaker openings 102 that penetrate the speakers 144 a and 144 b are formed on the upper left and right sides of the game window 101, and a stop lever for locking the stopper piece 194 of the glass unit 190 below the speaker opening 102. 108 is rotatably provided.

  On the other hand, a prize ball passing port 103 through which a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) of the dish unit 300 penetrates is opened in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and obliquely therethrough. A lid opening 105 for detaching the side opening lid 383 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is opened near the center, and a ball feeding unit 226 is mounted at an adjacent position on the open side of the lid opening 105. A ball feed opening 104 is opened, and a lock hole 106 through which the cylinder lock 62 passes is further opened closer to the opening side of the ball feed opening 104. A slide unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the slide unit 230 is formed on the back side of the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104. Similarly, engagement receiving pieces (not shown) for hooking the latching protrusions 195 of the glass unit 190 are formed on the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the back side of the lower plate-like portion. A mounting opening 110 to which the mounting elastic piece 213 of the security cover 210 is mounted is formed on the side of the security cover 210. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted forward into the guide hole 436 (see FIG. 17) of the dish unit 300. Further, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward, and engagement grooves 42 and 43 (see FIG. 1) formed in the door frame protruding piece 112 and the main body frame 3. Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the configuration of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of the door frame, and FIG. 13 is a pachinko that shows the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. 14 is a front perspective view of the machine, and FIG. 14 is a front view of the door frame when a member that irradiates the LED among members constituting the speaker cover and the decorative member is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the door lens unit 120 includes reflectors 122, 130 a, and 130 b having a front surface as a reflection surface, and cold cathode tubes 132 that are attached to the front and the inside of the reflectors 122, 130 a, and 130 b. 134a, 134b and LED boards 137, 138a, 138b, a light-transmissive lens cover 140 covering the front of the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, speakers 144a, 144b attached to the lens cover 140, and the lens cover And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of 140.

  The lens base body 121 is formed of a synthetic resin in a hollow triangular shape with an arc on the front side and an open rear surface on the back side in a plan view, and a high voltage current is supplied to the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b in the hollow interior. The inverter board 136 for supplying the power is stored and fixed. Further, an upper reflector 122 having an L-shaped cross section is attached so as to contact the front surface and the bottom surface of the lens base body 121. The upper reflector 122 is made of a polycarbonate resin colored in white, and has a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surface of the upper reflector 122 is a reflection surface that reflects light emitted from the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the LED 137a. The side reflectors 130a and 130b to be described next are also formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white. By the way, electrode support portions 125 for supporting both ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 are formed at both ends of the upper reflector 122, and the upper cold cathode tube 132 is supported at an appropriate interval on the front surface of the upper reflector 122. For this purpose, a cathode tube support piece 123 having a U-shaped tip is provided. This is because the center of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is bent in the shape of a “<”, and the center bent portion is stressed and easily damaged. Therefore, only the electrode support portions 125 at both ends are damaged. Rather than being supported by the cathode tube support piece 123 at an appropriate interval, and when the upper cold cathode tube 132 is supported by the cathode tube support piece 123, the upper cold cathode is sandwiched between heat resistant rubber packings (not shown). By supporting the tube 132 so as not to move, a support structure that is less likely to break can be obtained. In addition, the electrode support portions 125 at both ends are open at the top, and an electrode insertion hole (not shown) with one side opened to receive the end of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is formed on the peripheral wall facing inward. An elastically deformable rubber sleeve 133 attached to the end where the wiring of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is connected to this electrode insertion hole is inserted from above, which is the facing direction of the opening, and then the electrode The upper cold cathode tube 132 can be mounted on the front surface of the upper reflector 122 by fitting the electrode lid 127 from above the support portion 125. In this way, the rubber sleeve 133 is attached to both ends of the upper reflector 122, and the rubber sleeve 133 is supported in an electrode insertion hole (not shown) of the electrode support portion 125 in a loosely fitted state, whereby the upper cold cathode Even when the tube 132 vibrates due to an impact or the like, when the rubber sleeve 133 absorbs the vibration, the end of the cold cathode tube 132 swings or slides on the electrode support portion 125 to cause a breaking stress. Since it is weakened, it is possible to prevent the upper cold cathode tube 132 from being damaged at the electrode support portion 125 and the bent portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132. Note that speaker through holes 128a and 128b through which the speakers 144a and 144b penetrate are formed at the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively.

  Side reflectors 130a and 130b are connected to both ends of the upper reflector 122 so as to hang down. The side reflectors 130a and 130b are also formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white like the upper reflector 122, and have a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surface of the side reflectors 130a and 130b is a reflecting surface that reflects the light emitted from the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b and the LED 138c. Since the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b attached in front of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are linear, the electrode support portions 131a and 131b that support the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are provided on the side. It is formed at two locations on the upper and lower ends of the side reflectors 130a and 130b. Of course, when the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are supported by the electrode support portions 131a and 131b, the relationship between the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the electrode support portion 125 is the same. Rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are attached to the ends of 134b, and the rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are in contact with and supported by the electrode support portions 131a and 131b. Thereby, it can be set as the support structure which is hard to be damaged even if the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b vibrate.

  LED boards 137, 138a, 138b on which a large number of LEDs are mounted are attached to the inner side of the upper reflector 122 and the side reflectors 130a, 130b (positions that border the gaming window 101). The inner peripheral surface of the lens cover 140 described below is decorated by the LEDs 137a, 138c mounted on the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b (LEDs mounted on the LED substrates 138a, 138b are denoted by the same reference numerals 138c). Is done.

  The above-described lens base body 121, the upper cold cathode tube 132, and the upper reflector 122 and the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are attached are fixed to the back side of the lens cover 140. The lens cover 140 includes an upper lens cover portion 141 corresponding to the upper reflector 122 to which the lens base body 121 and the upper cold cathode tube 132 are attached, and a side reflector 130a to which the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are attached. , 130b and side lens cover portions 142a, 142b are formed of a transparent resin. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the white lens portions 141, 142a, and 142b. A red lens portion (not shown) formed of a synthetic resin having a different color is connected to the inside of the gaming window 101 at the lower rear end thereof. The red lens portion (not shown) is illuminated by a plurality of LEDs 137a and 138c mounted linearly on the upper LED substrate 137 and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b.

  By the way, the upper lens cover part 141 is formed in a wedge shape with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube 132 and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip portion is close. The front lens portion 141c colored in silver is adhered to the outer side of the wedge-shaped tip of the upper lens cover portion 141, and the front bulge surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 141 is cooled. Illumination is performed by the cathode tube 132. The side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are similar to the upper lens cover portion 141 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. The side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are formed in a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole compared with the lens cover portion 141. It is formed so that the distance between The front lens portion 142c colored in silver is adhered to the outer side of the wedge-shaped front end portions of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b, and has a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire side lens cover portions 142a and 142b. The front bulge surface is illuminated by the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b.

  In the above-described embodiment, the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LEDs 137a, 138c are used as the light emitting sources arranged in the space defined by the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, and the lens covers 141, 142a, Since 142b is molded and connected with synthetic resins having different colors, the lens covers 141, 142a, and 142b are molded with a structure and colors that are suitably irradiated by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LEDs 137a and 138c. It is something that can be done. Of course, different types of light-emitting sources are not limited to the combination of the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LEDs 137a, 138c, and both may be configured as LEDs.

  In addition, speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b for attaching the speakers 144a and 144b are formed in a connecting portion between the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b of the lens cover 140. The speakers 144a and 144b are provided with a speaker cone 145a on the front surface, and a cone support that supports the speaker cone 145a is attached from the back surface of the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b by an attachment member (not shown). Yes. Further, the front surfaces of the speaker mounting holes 143a and 143b are covered with speaker covers 146a and 146b in which mesh-shaped covers 147a and 147b are mounted on the front surfaces. As described above, the front surfaces of the speakers 144a and 144b are covered with the speaker covers 146a and 146b having the mesh-like covers 147a and 147b (punching metal).

  Further, decorative member attachment regions 148a and 148b are formed below the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b of the lens cover 140, and the decorative members 149a and 149b are attached to the decorative member attachment regions 148a and 148b. The decorative members 149a and 149b have a shape similar to the speaker covers 146a and 146b described above, and when the lens cover 140 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 140 are balanced. It is attached to give a good impression.

  By the way, the speaker covers 146a and 146b and the decorative members 149a and 149b described above do not simply cover the front of the speakers 144a and 144b or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 140, as described above, It is structured to be light decorated with LEDs. This structure will be described. First, the speaker covers 146a and 146b will be described. The speaker covers 146a and 146b have an LED substrate 152 in close contact with the back surface of a cover base plate 151 formed into a flat plate shape with a synthetic resin, while an inner speaker (not shown) with a speaker frame 154 built in front of the cover base plate 151. The lens and the front lens are covered, and the front surface is closed with mesh covers 147a and 147b.

  Next, the decorative members 149a and 149b will be described. The decorative members 149a and 149b are configured to have the LED substrate 156 in close contact with the back surface of the decorative base plate 155 formed into a flat plate shape with a synthetic resin, while the decorative frame 158 is built in front of the decorative base plate 155. The lens is covered with a lens or a decorative lens, and the front surface is closed with decorative plates 159a and 159b.

  As described above in detail, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b according to the present embodiment are the above-described cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and LEDs in the region surrounding the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5. Apart from the light decoration by the boards 137, 138a, 138b (corresponding to the frame decoration lamp 842 in FIG. 22), the four corners are mainly light-decorated, so the entire circumference except the lower side of the game window 101 is loose. Instead of being decorated with light, it can be a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only a speaker is conventionally arranged, and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery except the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively decorated with light.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 attached to the back side of the door frame body 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 is attached along the upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 attached along the upper side rear surface of the door frame main body 100 and the shaft support side side rear surface of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 162, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 attached along the open side of the door frame body 100, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal attached along the bottom side of the gaming window 101 of the door frame body 100. 164 are fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width of the door frame main body 100, and an upper bent protrusion 165 in which both end edges of the long side are bent rearward, A bent protruding piece 166 is formed. The upper bent protrusion 165 and the lower bent protrusion 166 are fitted into the upper crime prevention double groove 33 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3. The pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is also formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame body 100, and both end edges of the long side are bent rearward. The shaft support side short bent projecting piece 172 is very short, and the outer side bent projecting piece is a shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 formed in an L shape from the bent portion. The shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 has a tip end bent in an L shape so as to abut on the inner side of the shaft support side portion 49 extended on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 described above. It has become. The open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the vertically long dimension of the door frame main body 100, and an open-side outer bent protruding piece in which both end edges of the long side are bent backward. 173, an open-side inner bent protrusion 174. The open-side outer bent protrusion 173 is inserted into the side security groove 34 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3 described above, and the open-side inner bent protrusion 174 is a security recess of the main body frame 3. 35 (see FIG. 6). In addition, an engagement opening 175 is formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 so that the door frame hook portion 61 of the locking device 60 can enter, and covers the back side of the engagement opening 175. A hook cover 176 with which the door frame hook portion 61 is engaged is fixed. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 has a predetermined width and is substantially the same length as the width of the door frame main body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Although it becomes the downward bending protrusion piece 178 and the both sides of the upper long side edge are the upward bending protrusion pieces 179 bent toward the rear, The sandwiched portion is a vertical bent projecting piece 180 extending in the vertical direction. The vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape thereof matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190 described later, and when the glass unit 190 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent projecting piece 180 is adapted to engage with an engaging groove 200 formed along the outer periphery of the center of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190 in the width direction. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 177 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit>
Next, the glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the glass unit 190 includes an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 191 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101, and outer peripheral front and back surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 191. And a glass plate 201 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate) as two transparent plates. Stopping pieces 194 are formed on the left and right sides of the unit frame 191 so as to project toward the outside of the ring, and latching projections 195 are formed on the left and right sides of the unit frame 191 so as to project toward the outside of the ring. The stopper piece 194 and the latching protrusion 195 are for attaching the glass unit 190 to the back surface of the door frame 5 as described above. Further, the glass unit 190 in the present embodiment is provided on the rear end face of the unit frame 191 at the upper part of the stopper piece 194 and projecting outward at a lateral position of the speakers 144a and 144b and an intermediate position on the shaft support side. The projected plate portion 199 for crime prevention is formed integrally with the unit frame 191.

<Security cover>
Next, the crime prevention cover 210 provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 190 described above and prevents an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the security cover 210 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 190 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 162 and 163 with a transparent synthetic resin, and its upper side is It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 211 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail unit 462 of the game board 4, and a post-crime projecting piece 214 projects rearward along the contact recess 211. ing. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 215 is formed in a slanting manner on the shaft support side rear surface with the crime prevention cover 210 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 210, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 212 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190 with the crime prevention cover 210 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. The mounting elastic piece 213 formed in the projection is formed to project forward.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the mounting base 220 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and the front is opened by a transparent synthetic resin in the same manner as the security cover 210. It is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape. The mounting table 220 holds the firing rail 38 between the rear surface of the mounting table 220 and the plate portion 32 when the door frame 5 is closed in order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 38 to the game board 4. For this reason, the ball flight guide surface 227 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 220. By the way, the mounting base 220 according to the present embodiment is formed with a prize ball passing port opening 221 that penetrates the rearward protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering portion formed on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 at the upper portion on the pivotal support side. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 222 for mounting the ball feeding unit 226 is formed in the lower part on the open side. An area obliquely extending from the ball feeding unit mounting recess 222 is the ball flying guide surface 227. Further, the ball feed unit 226 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 222 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in accordance with the reciprocating motion difference of the hitting ball of the launcher 57, and the swing operation of this ball feed member Thus, the balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 38. Further, a lid opening 223 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 383 (to be described later) is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 220. Further, an upright wall 224 is formed to stand vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 220. The upright wall 224 is for restricting the lower portion of the security cover 210 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 210 when the security cover 210 is attached.

<Frame decoration relay terminal board>
As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, a frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting base 220, and a relay board cover 241 that covers the rear surface of the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is provided. It is attached. This frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is provided with electric parts and electric parts (cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b, LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b, speakers 144a, 144b, 341a, 341b, a handle unit provided on the door frame 5. The wiring provided from the switch, ball rental unit 324, operation button unit 326, etc. provided in 318 is connected together, and the wiring from the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. Are connected to the payout control board of the payout control board box 55 and the main control board of the main control board box 25 attached to the game board 4 via a relay board or the like incorporated in the game board 4.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. 15 is a front view of the dish unit provided on the front surface of the door frame, FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the dish unit, and FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the dish unit. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 constituting an appearance, a lower speaker unit 330 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, and an upper portion of the lower speaker unit 330. A dish body 360 that is disposed and faces the upper surface of the unit frame 301, a second ball extraction link unit 400 for performing a ball extraction operation of a ball extraction valve 375 provided on the dish body 360, and the unit frame 301 And a plate lid body 430 that closes the rear surface. First, the unit frame 301 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the unit frame 301 includes a top cover 302 having a semi-elliptical shape in plan view whose upper surface is gently inclined toward the front side, and a continuous side from the front side of the top cover unit 302. A front cover portion 303 constituting the front surface and the bottom surface is integrally formed of synthetic resin. A vertical cover portion 302 a that contacts the front side of the door frame main body 100 is also integrally formed on the back side of the upper surface cover portion 302. The vertical cover 302a has a ball rental button unit opening 323 at the center thereof, and the ball rental unit 324 can be attached to the ball rental button unit opening 323 from the back side. When a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the lending unit 324 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like.

  Further, a dish body upper surface opening 305 is opened forward from the rising portion of the vertical cover portion 302a of the upper surface cover portion 302, and an operation button unit concave space portion 306 is formed at the front center thereof. LED decoration space 307 is drilled from the portion 306 along the front end portions of the left and right upper surface cover portions 302, and further, a first ball extraction for attaching a first ball extraction button 313 to the side of the dish upper surface opening 305. A button opening 313a is provided. The above-described dish body upper surface opening 305 is formed in the same shape as the storage part 361 of the dish body 360 and the upper surface opening of the guide passage part 362 communicating with this, and when the dish body 360 is attached to the unit frame 301, The storage part 361 and the guide passage part 362 of the dish body 360 face the dish body upper surface opening 305.

  A space forming member 310 is attached to the above-described operation button unit concave space 306, and the operation button unit 326 is attached to the space forming member 310. An engagement hole 312 for engaging an engagement protrusion (not shown) of the operation button unit 326 and a fixing screw hole (not shown) of the operation button unit 326 are fixed to the space portion forming member 310. And a connector 310a for wiring that is connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the operation button unit 326 when the operation button unit 326 is inserted into the space forming member 310. A storage opening 310b is formed. (Partially deleted) The operation button unit 326 includes a plurality (three in the illustrated example) of operation buttons 327, and the plurality of operation buttons 327 are provided on the game board 4. It is operated when the player participates in the game content performed by the effect display device 115 or the like.

  Further, the first ball removal button 313 is attached to the upper surface cover portion 302 via a sliding support member 314 attached to the first ball removal button opening 313a of the upper surface cover portion 302. The member 314 is slid in the vertical direction. When the first ball removal button 313 is pressed by the player, the rotation member 366 located below the first ball removal button 313 rotates about the rotation shaft 367 in the clockwise direction. The slide valve 365 linked to the lower end of the rotating member 366 moves. The slide valve 365 is always urged by the spring 369 to close the downstream end portion of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360. However, when the slide valve 365 is moved by the operation of the first ball removal button 313 as described above. The guide passage portion 362 is retracted from the guide passage portion 362, and the guide passage portion 362 is communicated with the first ball extraction passage portion 364 continuous to the downstream side of the guide passage portion 362. Thereby, the balls stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 can be extracted from the dish body 360. This structure will be further described in detail when the dish 360 is described.

  Next, the configuration of the front cover portion 303 of the unit frame 301 will be described. As described above, the front cover portion 303 is configured so as to form a front surface and a bottom surface continuously from the front side of the upper surface cover portion 302. It is inclined to the back side as it protrudes to the left and right. Thus, speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on the left and right of the central protrusion of the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303, and the speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed by meshed speaker covers 316a and 316b (punching metal). It is covered. Then, two speakers 341a and 341b that are housed and fixed in the lower speaker unit 330 are located behind the speaker covers 316a and 316b. Note that the speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on an inclined surface inclined toward the back side from the protrusion at the center of the front surface of the front cover portion 303, so that when viewed from the front, the pachinko machine 1 That is, it opens from the center vertical line to the outside. A front decorative plate 304 is attached so as to border the protruding portion at the center of the front surface of the front cover portion 303 to the upper and lower opening edges of the speaker openings 315a and 315b.

  In addition, a handle attachment hole 317 for attaching the handle unit 318 is formed below the open side end of the front cover portion 303. As is well known, the handle unit 318 is for adjusting the resilience of the hit ball. For this reason, a rotation operation member 318a that can be operated by the player is provided, and the rotation operation member 318a is rotated. By operating, the engagement cam 319 fixed to the rear end of the rotation shaft rotates. As described above, by converting the rotational movement of the engaging cam 319 into the sliding movement of the slide engaging / disengaging piece 231 of the slide unit 230, the strength of the elastic force of the launching device 57 can be adjusted. It has become.

  Here, the second ball removal link unit 400 includes a second ball removal button 401, a pressing rocking member (not shown) that rocks when the second ball removal button 401 is locked, and the pressure rocking member. The first link 414 and the second link 419 are attached to a link member mounting plate (not shown) in order to transmit a pressing operation (not shown) as a ball swinging motion of the ball release valve 375. .

  A second ball extraction button opening 320 for opening the second ball extraction button 401 constituting a part of the second ball extraction link unit 400 is opened at the center lower portion of the front cover portion 303. In addition, a ball discharge port for discharging a ball, which is removed when the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401 are operated, to the outside of the dish unit 300 is provided at the center of the bottom surface of the front cover portion 303. 322 is formed, and a fastener insertion hole 325 for attaching the operation button unit 326 is formed in front of the ball discharge port 322 obliquely. In the present embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 313 and 401, the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401, are provided by the operation of the first ball removal button 313. Although all the spheres stored in the portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 can be removed, the ball removal operation takes a little time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage portion 362. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 401, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 361 of the dish body 360 can be quickly removed from the ball extraction opening 388 having a large diameter. Can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time for the player to take the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and when the game is continued with this being left, the saucer full tank switch 730 (on the upstream side of the dish unit 300) 22), the payout operation is stopped, or the ballistic operation is stopped and the game is not successful even though it is a big hit. In such a case, the second ball extraction button 401 By performing this operation, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 can be removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position can be maintained and the big hit game can be continued.

  Next, the configuration of the dish lid 430 that closes the back surface of the unit frame 301 of the dish unit 300 will be described. The dish lid body 430 is formed of a synthetic resin as a rectangular flat plate so as to close almost the entire back surface of the unit frame 301, and a ball passage passage rear collar 433 is formed integrally projectingly at the substantially center of the front surface side. Has been. A curved upper guide rod 434 and a lower guide rod 435 for guiding the ball forward and downward are formed on the rear ball passage 433, and the dish lid 430 is attached to the back surface of the unit frame 301. The in-dish ball extraction passage is configured to face the ball extraction passage front 337 formed in the speaker box main body 331 of the lower speaker unit 330. At this time, the guide rod 338 formed on the ball guide passage front rod 337 is positioned between the upper guide rod 434 and the lower guide rod 435 of the ball guide passage rear rod 433. The passage is formed in a meandering shape, and the ball that has been removed is discharged from the ball discharge port 322 to the outside while weakening the momentum.

  The dish lid 430 has an opening lid attachment window 432 on the upper side of the above-mentioned ball discharge passage rear ridge 433, and a rectangular cylindrical award ball contact on the upper back of one end side (axial support side). A collar 431 is provided in a protruding manner. When the dish unit 300 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the prize ball communication rod 431 penetrates the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the lower part of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100 and It penetrates to the back side, and faces the end of the prize ball passage formed in the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 in a superposed manner. The opening lid attaching window 432 is an opening for detachably attaching a side opening lid 383 that closes the side wall opening (not shown) of the second ball extraction passage portion (not shown) of the dish body 360, and is a door frame. It is provided at a position corresponding to a lid opening 105 (see FIGS. 11 and 12) formed in the main body 100.

[About the game board]
The configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 19 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board, FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the game board, and FIG. 21 is a game It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the board.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment fits the gaming panel 409 detachably into a plate-like gaming panel 409 made of a transparent resin having a size corresponding to the gaming area 20. A frame-shaped panel holder 540 made of resin, and a game panel 409 that is arranged in front of the panel holder 540 and cooperates with the panel holder 540 to form a game area 20 and a game ball in the game area 20 And a front component member 680 having a guide rail 482 including an inner rail unit 462.

  Further, the game board 4 has a plate-like panel back plate 504 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, and is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504 and the front side And a substrate holder 505 capable of supporting the peripheral control substrate box 24, the main control substrate box 25, and the like on the rear side. Specifically, the peripheral control board box 24 in which the peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 22) is mounted is mounted on the board holder 505, and the main control is performed while being superposed on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 24. A main control board box 25 in which a board 710 (see FIG. 22) is housed is mounted. Although not shown, the substrate holder 505 supports a drawer connector that is electrically connected to the main control substrate in the main control substrate box 25 supported on the rear side of the substrate holder 505 and is slidable from the rear. A drawer connector holder is further provided.

  Further, the game board 4 is attached and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 and has a back unit 510 having a frame-like box-shaped back box 514 capable of forming a predetermined volume space with the game panel 409. There is further provided an effect display device 115 comprising an LCD supported on the rear side of the back box 514 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. The effect display device 115 is detachably supported by the back box 514 so as to close an opening 514a formed on the rear surface side of the back box 514.

  A display device control board box 119 having a display device control board 816 (see FIG. 22) for controlling the effect display device 115 and the like is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. Further, the effect display device 115 is provided with a larger one (for example, 5 to 21 inches) than the effect display device used in the conventional pachinko machine.

  The front component member 680 in the game board 4 includes the guide rail 482 including the outer rail unit 472 and the inner rail unit 462 for guiding the game ball as described above, and the upper end of the outer rail unit 472 and the inner rail unit. An arc-shaped opening 680a that connects the lower end of 462 is provided, and the game area 20 having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front is defined by the guide rail 482 and the opening 680a. The guide ball 482 guides the game ball launched along the launch rail 38 by the game ball launching device 57 to the upper part of the game area 20.

  As shown in FIGS. 6, 18, and 19, the outer rail unit 472 has a connecting passage portion 477 that is connected to a rail connecting member 44 provided at the start end of the outer rail unit 472 as an extension of the firing rail 38. A foul port 473 is formed adjacent to the connecting passage portion 477. The stopper 476 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when the hit ball that has slid through the outer rail unit 472 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 20. The backflow prevention member 463 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken into the game area 20, from flowing back into the outer rail unit 472 again. Further, a security projection 465 (see FIG. 6) is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail unit 472 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The security protrusion 465 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 215 of the crime prevention projecting on the crime prevention cover 210 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps in the vertical direction between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle.

  In addition, an out port 471 is provided at the lower center of the inner rail unit 462, and a shot hit is played between the inner rail unit 462 and the outer rail unit 472 from the out port 471 to the backflow prevention member 463. Although it constitutes a guide passage that leads to the area 20, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail unit 472 without reaching the game area 20 is taken into the foul mouth 473 and discharged again to the dish body 360 of the dish unit 300. It has come to be. Further, a rail security groove 464 (see FIG. 6) is formed in the front component member 680 on the way from the out port 471 of the inner rail unit 462 to the stop portion 476. The rail crime prevention groove 464 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime protrusion piece 214 protruding from the crime prevention cover 210 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed enters the rail crime prevention groove 464. And the projections 214 after the crime prevention, the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wires that overlap in the vertical direction and are inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 This is what will ultimately be prevented.

  By the way, a positioning recess 466 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted to a board positioning projection 37 formed on the main body frame 3, and a board formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 467 to be inserted into a stopper insertion hole (not shown) is provided. When the game board stopper 467 is pushed and fixed, its end is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole. Therefore, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the game board 4 is entirely inserted after the positioning recess 466 is inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning projection 37. Is pushed into the game board installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 467 which is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end portion is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole and fixed. Thereafter, a game board fixing tool 46 that is rotatably provided on the upper front surface of the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure. However, in the case of the illustrated embodiment, a fastening portion 469 is formed by cutting out a part of the lower side on the lower side of the game board 4, and is formed on the fastening portion 469 and the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3. It is also possible to prevent the game board 4 from being removed from the main body frame 3 unless the fastening hole 41 is cut by fastening the fastening hole 41 with the fastening hole (not shown).

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 is formed with speaker cutout portions 468 formed on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to receive the rear protruding portions of the speakers 144a and 144b provided on the back surface of the door frame 5. A passage cutout portion 478 into which a part of the passage for discharging the prize ball is inserted is formed obliquely below the side.

  Further, a substrate holder 505 is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4. The substrate holder 505 is formed with a space so as to collect the winning balls in front of it, and a drop opening (not shown) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 471 and communicates with an out ball passage (not shown) formed in the substrate unit 54. Further, the substrate holder 505 has a peripheral control board box 24 for storing a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 22) for controlling a game operation and a main control board box for storing a main control board 710 (see FIG. 22) on the back surface thereof. 25 and a panel relay terminal plate 750 (see FIG. 22) for connection to a payout control board, a power supply board, and the like provided in the board unit 54 are attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the front component member 680 includes a plurality of positioning fixing bosses 680 c and positioning protrusions 680 d that protrude rearward on the rear surface side. The positioning fixing boss 680c and the positioning projection 680d can be positioned with the panel holder 540 and the substrate holder 505 disposed on the rear side, as will be described in detail later. A plurality of positioning protrusions 680d are also provided on the rear surface side of the inner rail unit 462, and are fitted and fixed in an inner rail fixing hole 409d of a game panel 409 described later.

  The game panel 409 in the game board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 20, and is formed of a transparent resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin. The game panel 409 is thinner than the panel holder 540 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when an obstacle nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The game panel 409 includes a plurality of fitting holes 409a that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the upper portion and are formed of round holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes that are disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the left and right lower portions and extend in the front-rear direction. 409b is provided. The fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b are disposed outside the game area 20, and are positioned with the panel holder 540.

  In addition, the game panel 409 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 409c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engaging step portion 409c has a shape in which approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 409 is cut out, and is disposed outside the game area 20 as well as the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b. The panel holder 540 and the game panel 409 are engaged and fixed.

  Furthermore, the game panel 409 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 409d at predetermined positions. The inner rail unit 462 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 680d protruding from the rear side of the inner rail unit 462 into the inner rail fixing hole 409d.

  In addition, the game panel 409 has a hole (not shown) for planting a failure nail (not shown) so as to penetrate the game panel 409. The inner diameter of the hole (not shown) is The diameter is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the obstruction nail planting side. A plurality of pilot holes (not shown) are drilled at predetermined positions in the game panel 409. A fault nail (not shown) is inserted into each pilot hole (not shown) from the front side using a fault nail planting device. By planting, a large number of obstacle nails have a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  In addition to a number of obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) is disposed at an appropriate position on the front side of the game panel 409. Further, the game panel 409 is appropriately formed with an opening 409e (not shown) penetrating in a predetermined shape so that the front component member 680 including the guide rail 78, the frame-shaped center accessory 620, and the like are fixed by screws. Has been.

  In addition, when the gaming panel 409 is a transparent resin plate formed by extrusion, the material may be removed so that the vertical direction of the gaming panel 409 is inclined by about 45 degrees with respect to the extrusion direction. The dot matrix of the effect display device 115 disposed behind the game panel 409 interferes with a plurality of fine molding marks formed by extrusion molding, and the occurrence of moire can be suppressed as much as possible. Thus, it is possible to prevent the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 from being difficult to see due to moire.

  Subsequently, the panel holder 540 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 409 in a front view and has a substantially rectangular shape, and is a member made of wooden plywood in a game board of a conventional pachinko machine (for example, a game board) It is made of a thermoplastic resin having a thickness (in this example, about 20 mm) substantially the same as the thickness of the base or the like. The panel holder 540 is detachably fitted with a game panel 409 and is fitted with a fitting step 540a that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side. The inside of the fitting step 540a is substantially the same size as the game area 20. Now, a through hole 540b penetrating in the front-rear direction is mainly provided.

  The fitting step portion 540a of the panel holder 540 has a depth from the front surface substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 409, and the front surface of the game panel 409 fitted to the fitting step portion 540a is the panel holder 540. It is designed to be substantially flush with the front surface of the. In addition, the fitting step portion 540a has a front inner peripheral surface that has a predetermined amount of clearance (not shown) with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 409. With this clearance, even if the game panel 409 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with an engaged portion that engages with the engagement step portion 409c at a position corresponding to the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409. More specifically, the engaged portion disposed in the fitting step portion 540a on the lower side of the panel holder 540 corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 409c in the game panel 409, and is in contact with the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. An engagement protrusion that extends a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 540 with a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409 to be inserted therebetween. 540c is formed. On the other hand, the engaged portion disposed in the fitting step portion 540a on the upper side of the panel holder 540 corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 409c in the game panel 409 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. The engaging claw portion 540d is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 409c. The engagement claw portion 540d has such a size that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 540. By engaging the engagement step 409c of the game panel 409 with the engagement protrusion 540c and the engagement claw 540d, the panel holder 540 can hold the game panel 409 in a detachable manner. .

  Further, the panel holder 540 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b formed in the game panel 409 fitted and supported by the fitting step portion 540a, from the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. A plurality of projecting pins 540e that extend forward and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 540e into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409, the panel holder 540 and the game panel 409 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a boss insertion hole 540f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning fixing boss 680c provided in the front component member 680 can be inserted, and the positioning of the front component member 680 in the boss insertion hole 540f. By inserting the fixed boss 680c, the panel holder 540 and the front component member 680 are positioned relative to each other.

  The panel holder 540 is provided with a mounting support portion 540g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface side. The rear surface of the panel holder 540 is recessed by a mounting support portion 540g above the predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression (depth Is a depth that can accommodate a flange-shaped fixing portion of a predetermined member such as the back box 514 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 540g (in this example, about 2.5 mm, between 1 to 3 mm) It is desirable that By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 540g, it is possible to prevent the fixed portion from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 540, and the panel holder 540, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. It can be securely attached to the main body frame 3.

  Further, the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 540g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and can receive the recessed panel back plate 504 toward the front side. The housing recess 540h and a latching portion (not shown) that is disposed so as to penetrate the housing recess 540h in the front-rear direction and that can latch the latching claw 504c formed on the panel back plate 504 are further provided. . The housing recess 540h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 504 by locking the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 to this locking portion (not shown), and the panel back plate 504 of the received panel back plate 504. The rear surface is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 540.

  Next, the center accessory 620 of the game board 4 is an accessory that is formed in the game area 20 with various ornamental bodies, winning holes, etc., and is attached from the front side of the game panel 409. Yes. Specifically, as described above, the game panel 409 is appropriately formed with an opening 409e for attaching the center accessory 620, and the center accessory 620 is fitted into each opening 409e from the front side of the game panel 409. Later, it is fixed with screws.

  The center accessory 620 has a frame-shaped decorative body 622 as a main component, and the effect display device 115 disposed behind can be visually recognized through an opening 621 formed in the center of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. ing. However, a transparent plate 621 a made of a transparent resin is formed in the opening 621 so as to cover the entire back surface of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. Therefore, from the front side of the game board 4, the behind-the-scenes display device 115 can be visually recognized through the opening 621 (transparent plate 621 a), while the game ball is centered through the opening 621 (transparent plate 621 a). It is impossible to enter behind the character 620.

  In the state where the center combination 620 is attached to the game panel 409, the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a form substantially the same plane (become substantially flush). Therefore, in the game board 4, the light can pass in the back direction or the near side beyond the position where the game panel 409 is arranged (the plane position formed by the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a), In principle, the game ball is prevented from entering in the back direction beyond the position where the game panel 409 is arranged (the plane position formed by the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a).

  Next, the rear unit 510 of the game board 4 is configured such that the effect display device 115 is detachably attached to the rear side thereof. Specifically, the back unit 510 is formed so as to be separated from the upper and lower sides on one side (left side in rear view) extending vertically on the inner periphery of the opening 514a formed in a substantially rectangular shape in the back box 514. Two attachment / detachment grooves 516 and an attachment / detachment mechanism 518 having an attachment / detachment lever disposed on the rear surface of the back box 514 on the opposite side to the attachment / detachment groove 516 (right side in rear view).

  On the other hand, the effect display device 115 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, is formed at positions separated from each other in the vertical direction on one of the left and right side surfaces (the left side surface in the rear view), and protrudes outward. Two attachment / detachment protrusions 116 and an attachment / detachment latch that is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction on the other side surface (the side surface on the right side in the rear view) opposite to the side surface on which the attachment / detachment protrusions 116 are formed and protrudes outward. Part 118. The attachment / detachment protrusion 116 and the attachment / detachment locking portion 118 are formed so as to correspond to the attachment / detachment groove 516 and the attachment / detachment mechanism 518 of the back unit 510 so that the effect display device 115 can be attached to and detached from the back unit 510.

  Further, the back unit 510 is provided with a rotation distribution accessory and a decoration accessory which will be described later. In addition, a plurality of electrical components and light emitters described later are disposed on the front side of the back unit 510. Then, a lamp driving board box 508 that houses a lamp driving board 850 (see FIG. 22) that is connected to these accessories, electrical components, etc., and controls driving is disposed at the lower back of the back unit 510. .

  Next, the panel back plate 504 of the game board 4 is arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 so as to cover a lightening portion within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and in the receiving recess 540h of the panel holder 540. The rear surfaces can be accommodated so that they are substantially the same surface. Further, the board holder 505 of the game board 4 is disposed in the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504 and has a box shape in which the front side and the upper side are opened. The substrate holder 505 collects game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 and can discharge them downward from a game ball discharge port (not shown).

  The substrate holder 505 is provided with a cylindrical fixing boss 505 e that fits with the positioning fixing boss 680 c of the front component 680 at a predetermined position on the front side thereof, and this fixed boss 505 e is connected to the front component 680. With the panel holder 540 sandwiched therebetween, the front component 680 is fitted with the positioning fixing boss 680c, and a predetermined screw is passed through the through hole 505f penetrating the fixed boss 505e from the rear of the substrate holder 505. The front component member 680, the panel holder 540, and the substrate holder 505 can be fixed by screwing into the positioning fixing boss 680c.

  Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with an opening receiving portion 505g communicating with the foul port 473 of the front component member 680 at the lower part of the front surface thereof. The opening receiving portion 505g can guide the game ball to the lower side of the substrate holder 505 at a position different from the out port 471, and the “dead ball” received inside the substrate holder 505 and the game ball can be played. When driving into the area 20, it is possible to distinguish a game ball that has been missed.

  In this example, except for a part of the front component member 680, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, and the substrate holder 505 are formed of thermoplastic resin, and these members can be recycled. It is like that. As the resin, acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, polypropylene, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, and the like can be used. In addition to the thermoplastic resin, a thermosetting resin is appropriately used according to the function and application. It may be used. In addition to the game panel 409, transparent resin may be used for the front component 680, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, and the like.

  Further, at least the game panel 409 is configured by a transparent member, and is arranged behind the game board 4 through the game panel 409 even if the game board 4 does not have an opening as in the conventional pachinko machine 1. Since the effect display device 115 can be visually recognized, the area in which the game ball can actually flow down in the game area 20 can be made as wide as possible, and the game ball can be moved in various ways to enhance the player's interest. It is possible to prevent the decrease. Further, since the game panel 409 in which the game area 20 is formed is configured by a transparent member, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the game panel 409, for example, behind the game panel 409. In addition, a large effect display device 115 extending over the entire game area 20 is arranged to display an unprecedented large effect image, and various effects and decorations are arranged in the depth direction so far. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal power that can attract the player's interest can be obtained.

<About Center Title>
Next, the center accessory 620 disposed from the front side of the game panel 409 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, a frame-shaped center accessory 620 is arranged at the center of the game area 20. The center accessory 620 occupies a width of 4/5 or more in the width direction of the game area 20. The center accessory 620 has a substantially rectangular opening 621. The center accessory 620 includes a frame-shaped decorative body 622, and the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 621.

  And the effect display apparatus 115 is arrange | positioned behind the transparent plate 621a arrange | positioned so that the opening part 621 may be obstruct | occluded so that it can visually recognize through this opening part 621 by front view. That is, the inside of the center combination 620 (that is, the opening 621) is an image display area 20a in which the effect display device 115 is exposed in the game area 20. And the game area 20 is divided into the above-mentioned image display area 20a and the ball flow-down area 20b where game balls mainly flow down by the center accessory 620. In principle, the game ball enters the image display area 20a only when the game ball passes through warp paths 550 and 650, which will be described later.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large number of game balls enter the opening 621 and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the behind-the-scenes display device 115 due to the game balls. In particular, in the present embodiment, despite the fact that the display device 115 is larger than the conventional display, the image display area 20a keeps the various displays displayed on the display device 115 in a good state that is easy to visually recognize. The person can surely visually recognize various effects displayed on the effect display device 115.

  In the gaming panel 409, the center role 620 is arranged so as not to come into contact with the front component 680, and a game ball driven into the game area 20 passes through the right side or the left side of the center role 620. It flows down toward an out port 471 provided below the center accessory 620. In the present embodiment, the arcuate side wall extending from the upper side of the center accessory 620 (specifically, the frame-shaped decorative body 622) in the clockwise direction in the clockwise direction is between the inner peripheral wall of the front component member 680. They are close enough to form a gap through which only one game ball can pass. Therefore, most of the game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 flow down to the left side of the game area 20 in which a second starting port 602 and a passage gate 612, which will be described later, are disposed. On the other hand, among the game balls that are driven into the game area 20, a part of the game balls that are driven with a large elasticity by the launching device 57 can flow down the right side of the game area 20 one by one.

  A first start port 600 capable of receiving a game ball that is driven toward the game area 20 is disposed below the center accessory 620. A third start port 604 (a second start port will be described later) having a pair of movable pieces 606 is disposed below the first start port 600. When the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the closed state, the third start port 604 is unable to receive the game ball or difficult to receive. When the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the open state, It becomes easier to accept game balls than the one start port 600.

  A jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is provided between the first start port 600 and the out port 471, specifically below the third start port 604 and above the out port 471 (directly above in the present embodiment). Is provided. The jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 includes a jackpot gaming big prize opening 500a and a jackpot gaming big prize opening opening / closing door 500b provided corresponding to the jackpot gaming big prize opening 500a. The jackpot game winning prize opening 500a is an opening through which a game ball can be received. The jackpot gaming prize winning opening / closing door 500b is a member for switching the jackpot gaming prize winning opening 500a between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult. is there. It should be noted that when the big hit game winning prize opening 500a is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is impossible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 20, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. There may be.

  On the left side of the first starting port 600, a passing gate 612 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Further, three general winning ports 614 are provided on the left and right sides of the third starting port 604 slightly below the passing gate 612.

  The game balls that did not win any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 are discharged to the back of the game board 4 on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game balls. An out port 471 is formed. That is, game balls that have not won any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 provided upstream of the out port 471 in the flow direction of the game ball. Then, it flows down toward this out port 471.

  The jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is disposed immediately above the out port 471. Thus, during the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500, the game balls that have not won any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 are opened / closed for the jackpot gaming. Since it gathers in the vicinity of the apparatus 500, it can have a sense of expectation of winning a prize.

  An LED display area 80 composed of a plurality of LEDs is formed at the lower right of the center accessory 620. In this LED display area 80, a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 900 to be described later, and a second special symbol display for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 910. 86, a first special symbol hold indicator 88 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (the number of lottery processes performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 in the hold state) and the second A second special symbol hold display 90 is provided for displaying the number of lotteries held by the special symbol lottery means 910 (the number of lottery processes performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 in the on-hold state). The LED display area 80 is provided with a normal symbol display 82 for displaying a lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920 and a normal symbol hold indicator 92 for displaying the number of lottery holds by the normal symbol lottery means 920. ing. These displays can recognize that a plurality of processes relating to the progress of the game sequentially executed by a main control board 710 described later are functioning based on control data stored in a RAM 713 described later. It can also be said to be a main control function diagnostic display.

  Each of these indicators 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92 is composed of, for example, an LED, and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the second special symbol lottery means, depending on the lighting state of this LED. The lottery result by 910, the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920, the holding number of lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the holding number of lotteries by the second special symbol lottery means 910, and the holding number of lotteries by the normal symbol lottery means 920 Is notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” refers to the number of holds for the determination (lottery process) of whether or not the acquired random number for determination is correct, although the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired. This means, but is not limited to this, and it may be the number of determinations of the randomness for success / failure determination that suspends acquisition of the randomness for determination of success / failure and suspends the acquisition.

  Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  The center accessory 620 has a shelf-like stage 660 near the lower frame of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. In addition, in order to guide the game ball flowing down the game area 20 to the first stage 660 near the center of the left frame of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 in the vertical direction (that is, to the side of the frame-shaped decorative body 622). A first warp inlet 652 that can be received in the first warp passage 650 that is a stage guide path is provided. The game ball received at the first warp inlet 652 is discharged from the first warp outlet 654 and guided to the first stage 660. That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area 20 enters the first warp inlet 652, the game ball is transferred to the first stage 660 provided inside the center accessory 620 via the first warp passage 650. It is comprised so that.

  The first warp inlet 652 is provided below the second start port 602 in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area 20. A warp guide piece 658 for guiding the game ball to the first warp inlet 652 is provided below the first warp inlet 652. The warp guide piece 658 protrudes leftward from the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, from the center accessory 620 to the game area 20), so that the game ball is easily guided to the first warp inlet 652. Therefore, even when the game ball is not guided to the second start port 602, the expectation that the game ball is received at the first warp inlet 652 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The first stage 660 has a curved surface formed in a wave shape from the first warp outlet side end 666 to the first warp counter-exit side end 668. Specifically, a crest portion 662 that bulges upward is formed at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the stage 660, and a trough portion 664 continuously connected to the crest portion 662 is formed on the left and right sides of the crest portion 662. Is formed.

  In addition, the height of the peak portion 662 is lower than the first warp outlet side end portion 666 and the first warp opposite outlet side end portion 668. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the first warp outlet 654 can get over the mountain portion 662 and reciprocate between the first warp outlet side end 666 and the first warp counter-exit side end 668. Can roll.

  As a result, the flow direction of the game ball in the first warp passage 650 and the rolling direction of the game ball in the first stage 660 are substantially on the same line. There is little loss. That is, kinetic energy is lost when a game ball that has flowed down the first warp passage 650 changes its traveling direction. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp passage 650 rolls on the first stage 660 vigorously. In the present embodiment, the game ball is not guided to the first stage 660 from the right side of the center accessory 620. That is, since the game ball is guided to the first stage 660 only from the left side of the center role 620, the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 is inhibited from rolling by the game ball guided from the opposite direction. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the time for the game ball to roll on the first stage 660 vigorously and stay on the first stage 660 becomes longer, and as a result, the game ball plays in the first stage 660 and the interest is enhanced.

  In addition, a guide groove that is inclined downward toward the front side is formed in the peak portion 662 of the first stage 660 in order to guide the game ball to the first start port 600. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 loses the momentum to roll near the mountain portion 662, the game ball is easily guided to the first start port 600 by the guide groove. On the other hand, a trough 664 of the first stage 660 is formed with a guide groove that is inclined downward toward the front side in order to guide the game ball to the side of the first start port 600. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 loses the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the valley 664, the game ball is relatively easily guided to the first start port 600 by the guide groove. . Therefore, even when the game ball is not guided to the second start port 602, the expectation that the game ball is received at the first start port 600 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

<About back unit>
Next, the back unit 510 disposed on the back side of the game panel 409 will be described. As described above, on the back side of the game panel 409, the back unit 510 in which the effect display device 115 is arranged in the center is attached. From the front side of the game board 4, the opening 621 of the center accessory 620 is opened. Thus, the effect display device 115 and the back unit 510 are visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the back unit 510 has a shelf-like second stage 560 formed near the bottom wall of the opening 514 a of the back box 514. A second warp passage 550 is provided on the left side wall of the opening 514a of the back box 514. The second warp passage 550 is a stage guide path for guiding the game ball won in the second start port 602 to the second stage 560. . In addition, the game ball received in the second start port 602 is discharged from the second warp outlet 554 and guided to the second stage 560. That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area 20 enters the second start port 602, the game ball is provided inside the back box 514 (that is, the bottom wall of the opening 514a) via the second warp passage 550. The second stage 560 is conveyed.

  The game ball received in the second start port 602 flows down in the second warp passage 550 provided on the front side of the back unit 510 (that is, behind the game panel 409). 550 is configured as a transparent member. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the gap between the game panel 409 and the back unit 510 through the transparent game panel 409. Therefore, the player can observe the state that the game ball received in the second start port 602 is conveyed to the second stage 560, and the interest is enhanced.

  The second stage 560 is provided with a rotary distribution tool 580 having a rod-like body whose diameter is reduced in the left-right direction with the left-right direction of the game board 4 being the longitudinal axis direction. Then, the second stage 560 has a substantially intermediate height in the left-right direction on the front side of the rotational distribution member 580 lower than the second warp outlet side end portion 566 and the second warp counter-exit side end portion 568. Inclined so that Therefore, the game ball guided to the second stage 560 is the second warp outlet side end portion 666 and the second warp counter-exit side on the front side (front stage 560a) of the rotation distribution combination 580 in the second stage 560. It can roll back and forth between the end portions 668.

  The rotation distribution combination 580 provided on the second stage 560 rotates in one direction from the near side to the far side with the horizontal direction of the game board 4 as the axis line center. A magnetic body (not shown) is provided in the magnetized portion 580a, which is a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the rotational distribution member 580, and the game ball is attached to the magnetized portion 580a by the magnetic force of the magnetic body. It is possible to contact. That is, when the game ball rolling on the front stage 560a of the second stage 560 loses the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the magnetized portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580, it is attached to the magnetized portion 580a by the magnetic force. Will be.

  In addition, on the rear side (rear stage 560b) of the rotary distribution role 580 in the second stage 560, a special receiving port 562 that can receive a game ball is provided at the approximate center in the left-right direction. Adjacent to each other. In addition, on the left and right sides of the special receiving port 562, a normal receiving port 564 is formed adjacent to the rotary distribution combination 580, respectively. Then, the game ball attached to the magnetically attached portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580 is transported to the back side of the second stage 560 as the rotary distribution role 580 rotates, and the special receiving port 562 and the normal receiving port 562 It is received by being distributed to any of the receiving ports 564.

  As described above, by using the game ball won at the second start port 602 to perform the sorting operation by the rotary sorting tool 580 in the second stage 560, the game ball won at the second start port 602 or more. It is possible to give the player a sense of joy and superiority. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is received at the special receiving port 562, a certain point is given to the player, and when the accumulated point becomes equal to or greater than a specific value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. (For example, a special effect that is not normally displayed is displayed). Therefore, when a game ball wins at the second start port 602, the player will be watching whether or not the game ball is received by the special receiving port 562, so that the excitement of the game can be enhanced. .

  Note that the rear stage 560b of the second stage 560 is inclined so that the height of the substantially intermediate position in the left-right direction is higher than the second warp outlet side end 666 and the second warp counter-exit side end 668. ing. Therefore, if the game ball attached to the magnetically attached portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580 is not received by either the special reception port 562 or the normal reception port 564, the game ball moves on the rear stage 560b. After rolling toward the second warp outlet side end 666 or the second warp counter-exit side end 668, it is again guided to the front stage 560a. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the second stage 560 is surely received in either the special receiving port 562 or the normal receiving port 564.

  On the other hand, a disk-like accessory 590 that is a decorative body imitating an unidentified flying object (so-called UFO) is provided in the vicinity of the upper wall of the opening 514a of the back box 514. An electrical decoration member is provided. More specifically, three hemispherical lower electrical decoration bodies 592 projecting downward are provided on the bottom surface side of the main body 591, and two upper parts simulating a circular window are provided on the front side of the main body 591. An electrical decoration body 594 is provided, and a line-shaped middle electrical decoration body 596 extending left and right is provided between the lower electrical decoration body 592 and the upper electrical decoration body 594.

  Inside the main body portion 591 of the disk-shaped accessory 590, there is an LED substrate (not shown) having LEDs as light emitting sources corresponding to each of the electric decorations 592, 594, 596 in the back. The driving of these electric decorators 592, 594, 596 is also controlled by a lamp driving board 850 (see FIG. 22) housed in a lamp driving board box 508 provided in the back unit 510.

  Note that the opening 514a of the back box 514 is formed so as to partially protrude upward, and a disk-shaped accessory 590 is fitted into the protruding portion. Therefore, when the game board 4 is viewed from the front, only the lower electric decoration 592 of the disk-like accessory 590 overlaps the displayable area of the effect display device 115. As described above, even if the disk-like accessory 590 having a relatively large volume is provided in the back unit 510, the range in which the disk-like accessory 590 overlaps the displayable area of the effect display device 115 is narrow. It is prevented that the effect display device 115 becomes difficult to visually recognize by the object 590.

  By the way, the back unit 510 is provided with a second stage 560 for performing an effect of distributing the game balls, a rotary sorting tool 580, a large disk-shaped tool 590 for decorating the game board 4, and the like. In addition, since the effect display device 115 larger than usual is attached to the back unit 510, the rearward protruding portion of the game board 4 is necessarily enlarged. However, in this embodiment, the rearward projecting portion of the game board 4 can be easily accommodated by the structure for mounting the game board 4 by the game board installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 described above. Therefore, the game board 4 can employ various parts and shapes not only on the front side of the game panel 409 but also on the back side, and the game board 4 can have a more diverse and deep structure.

<About the electrical decoration member of the game board and its light emission mode>
The game board 4 is provided with a plurality of electric parts and light emitters, and the driving of these electric parts and the like is performed in a lamp driving board 850 (which is accommodated in a lamp driving board box 508 provided in the back unit 510. (See FIG. 23). Hereinafter, the main ones of these electric parts will be described in detail. In addition, the electrical decoration components and light emitters provided on the game board 4 correspond to the center decoration lamp 853 in FIG.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the center accessory 620 is formed with a plurality of wing-shaped decorative bodies 630 having a substantially wing shape when viewed from the front. The plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 are slightly curved from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outer periphery of the game board 4 in front view from the upper side to the lower right side in the clockwise direction in the frame-shaped decorative body 622 of the center accessory 620. However, it is formed at substantially equal intervals so as to extend (that is, radially). Each feather-shaped decorative body 630 has a blade-shaped shape that gradually becomes wider in a front view as it extends in the extending direction (the direction toward the outer periphery of the game board 4).

  In addition, a blade-type decorative body 632 protruding from the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is formed on the left side of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 of the center accessory 620. This feather-shaped decorative body 632 is formed to extend while slightly curving from the left edge of the effect display device 115 to a position where it is joined to the inner rail unit 462 in front view. It should be noted that the wing-shaped decorative body 632 is also a wing-shaped decorative body that gradually becomes wider in the front view as it goes in the extending direction (direction toward the outer periphery of the game board 4), like the wing-shaped decorative body 630 described above. Make a shape.

  However, the plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 are formed in the inner region of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, the image display area 20a) where the game balls do not flow down, whereas the blade-shaped decorative bodies 632 It protrudes from the outer region of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, the ball flow-down region 20b). Therefore, the wing-shaped decorative body 632 provided in the ball flow down region 20b allows a game ball to pass behind it, so that a space slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the wing-type decorative body 632 and the game panel 407. In addition, the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is installed to the inner rail unit 462. Further, unlike the plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 630, the blade-shaped decorative body 632 is formed with a slit-shaped window portion 632a so that a game ball flowing down behind can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, the back unit 510 is also formed with a plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 530 that are substantially blade-shaped when viewed from the front. The plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 530 extend while slightly curving from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outer periphery of the game board 4 in a front view from the lower left to the upper clockwise in the opening 514a of the back box 514. (Ie, radially), they are formed at substantially equal intervals. Each feather-shaped decorative body 530 becomes wider in front view as it extends in the extending direction (the direction toward the outer periphery of the game board 4), like the blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 of the center accessory 620. forming a blade shape such as.

  On the front side of the back unit 510, an LED substrate 535 (see FIG. 20) having a plurality of LEDs as a light emission source is provided at a position corresponding to the above-described blade-type decorative body 630, 632 in front view. Yes. In other words, the LED boards 535 are respectively provided behind the feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 of the center accessory 620 via the game panel 409. Each blade-type decorative body 630, 632 emits white light at the outer edge portion of each blade-type decorative body 630, 632 when viewed from the front by driving the LED substrate 535 provided behind each blade-type decorative body 630, 632.

  Similarly, in the back unit 510, an LED substrate 535 is also provided behind the plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 530. Each blade-type decorative body 530 emits white light at the outer edge portion of each blade-type decorative body 530 when viewed from the front by driving the LED substrate 535 provided behind each blade-type decorative body 530.

  Here, the feather-shaped decorative body 530 is provided in the back unit 510, while the blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 are provided in the center accessory 620. However, when the game board 4 is viewed from the front, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 form a series of decorative members that extend radially from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outline of the game board 4. When the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 emit light by driving the corresponding LED substrates 535, an effect is provided in which light extends radially from the effect display device 115 in the outer direction of the game board 4. Thereby, the impression as if the effect display device 115 emitted light toward the outline of the game board 4 beyond the displayable region (that is, the impression that the light emission display extends outward from the effect display device 115). And the illusion that the displayable area of the effect display device 115 temporarily increases.

  Further, the back unit 510 is formed with a plurality of third light-like decorative bodies 520 in front view. These light-like decorative bodies 520 are configured as a set of one blue lens body and two red lens bodies adjacent to the blue lens body. In the light decorative body 520, the blue lens body and the red lens body have a circular shape, and the red lens body has a smaller diameter than the blue lens body.

  The plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 are arranged at substantially equal intervals on the front side of the back unit 510 so as to surround the entire circumference of the opening 514a of the back unit 510. Further, behind each light-like decorative body 520, an LED substrate (not shown) including LEDs corresponding to each of the three lens bodies (one blue lens body and two red lens bodies) is provided. . By driving the LED substrate (not shown), each light-like decorative body 520 emits light through the red lens body or the blue lens body.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the back unit 510 provided on the rear side of the game board 4 (behind the game panel 409) includes various electrical decoration members (particularly, a plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520). The illumination member projects light on the front side of the game board 4. Furthermore, many of the main components that make up the game board 4 are light transmitting members, such as the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a made of transparent resin. Therefore, an electric lighting member such as a plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 gives an impression that the entire game board 4 is lit up in a front view, and it is strongly emphasized that the depth of the game board 4 is deep.

  More specifically, when only the blue lens body is caused to emit light among the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520, the back unit is connected via the game panel 409, the transparent plate 621 a, etc. by the blue light emission of each light-like decorative body 520. In addition to 510, the center accessory 620, the front component 680, and the like are illuminated in blue. On the other hand, when only the red lens body is caused to emit light among the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520, not only the back unit 510 but also the game panel 409, the transparent plate 621a, etc. due to the red light emission of each light-like decorative body 520. The center accessory 620, the front constituent member 680, and the like are also illuminated in red. In other words, by utilizing the fact that the depth of the game board 4 is deep, each light-like decorative body 520 emits light from the back side of the game board 4 toward the front, so that the entire game board 4 is illuminated. Can be decorated. This not only gives a strong visual impact to the player, but also gives the impression that the depth of the game board 4 can be seen deeper than it actually is. it can.

  In addition, when the blue lens body and the red lens body are caused to emit light simultaneously in each light-like decorative body 520, the light-like decorative body 520 emits pink light from a player spaced a predetermined distance from the game board 4. It is grasped as. Therefore, it is possible to cause not only the back unit 510 but also the center accessory 620 and the front constituent member 680 to illuminate in pink by the light emission of each light-like decorative body 520 through the game panel 409.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the decorative design displayed on the effect display device 115 is represented by one of red, blue, and pink. That is, the three colors of red, blue, and pink can be said to be image colors that symbolize the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The red, blue, and pink light emission control by the light decorative body 520 has an effect of impressing the player with the image color of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in a conventional pachinko machine, a game window (glass unit) formed on a door frame is usually formed in a substantially circular shape in accordance with a game area of a game board. However, in the present embodiment, the gaming window 101 (glass unit 190) formed in the door frame 5 is vertically long and has a size so as to substantially exceed the gaming area 20 and to include substantially the entire gaming board 4 in a front view. It is formed in a substantially octagonal shape. That is, the area of the game window 101 (glass unit 190) is extremely large compared to the conventional one. Thereby, the player can experience the depth of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment more strongly, and light emitted from various electrical decoration members from the back side of the game board 4 is on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. (I.e., the player can easily grasp the light emission mode).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the depth at which the game board 4 is arranged is deep, it is difficult for light to enter the game area 20 from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in a state where the effect display device 115 and various electric decoration members are not driven, the game area 20 is darker than the conventional pachinko machine. And the effect display apparatus 115 and various electrical decoration members are located in the back | inner side of the game board 4 which is hard to be illuminated with the light from the outside.

  From this, the situation display device 115 and various electrical decoration members are prevented from being prevented from visually recognizing the display mode and the light emission mode by the light entering from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. That is, since the effect display device 115 and various electric decoration members are displayed or light-emitted on the back side of the game board 4 kept in a relatively dark state, the player can display images and various electric lights on the effect display device 115. It is easy to visually recognize the light emission mode of the decorative member.

  Further, by using a structure that blocks the entrance of light from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and intentionally darkening the effect display device 115 and various electric decoration members, the gaming area 20 is darker than the conventional gaming machine. State. Then, using the intentionally darkened game area 20, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the game area 20 is a space or a concert venue. For example, in this game area 20, it is possible to produce a UFO that floats in outer space in a pseudo manner by illuminating or emitting light from the disk-shaped accessory 590. In the game area 20, more various effects can be realized by using the image display on the effect display device 115 and the light emission modes of various electric decoration members.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can effectively perform light decoration on the entire periphery of the door frame 5 except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. In the conventional pachinko machine 1, the light-decorated range is mainly limited to the game area 20, while the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is light-decorated including the game area 20 and the door frame 5 when viewed from the front. The range is extremely large. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a two-dimensional spread of light decoration that could not be achieved with a conventional gaming machine.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing light decoration with an electric decoration member from the back side of the game board 4, an unprecedented depth feeling due to light decoration is realized. In other words, combined with the flatness and depth of light decoration, players will feel as if they are wrapped in light decoration, and they will be able to concentrate on the game while experiencing an unprecedented interest. it can.

  Further, by performing light decoration with an electric decoration member from the back side of the game board 4, the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is illuminated by the light. Thereby, an impression can be given to the player as if the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is floating. Furthermore, since the light that illuminates the game ball is diffusely reflected on the surface of the game ball, the color of the game ball can have a complex variety, and the game ball is a meteor flowing through outer space for the player. it is possible to give the Kano such images.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
Next, a control configuration of the main board and the peripheral board of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 22 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board. FIG. 23 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  Control of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 700 (shown in FIG. 22) and a group of peripheral boards 800 (shown in FIG. 23). The group of main boards 700 controls game operations (winning detection, random number acquisition and winning determination, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 800 has stage operations (issue decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display). And the operation of the decorative body).

  As shown in FIG. 22, the main board 700 includes a main control board 710 and a payout control board 720. The main control board 710 includes a CPU 711 as a central processing unit, a ROM 712 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 713 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 711 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 712, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 800 or the payout control board 720.

  The RAM 713 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 710.

  Note that the main board 700 is connected to the power supply board 395 so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395. Specifically, operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395 to the payout control board 720, and operating power is supplied to the main control board 710 via the payout control board 720.

  The input interface of the main control board 710 detects the winning state to the first starting port sensor 780 and the second starting port 602 for detecting the winning state to the first starting port 600 via the panel relay terminal plate 750. The second start port sensor 782 that performs, the third start port sensor 784 that detects the winning state to the third start port 604, the gate sensor 760 that detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 612, and the general winning port 614. A general winning opening sensor 762 for detecting that the ball has won is connected.

  Further, an opening / closing device count sensor 776 is connected to an input interface of the main control board 710 via an opening / closing device relay terminal plate 754 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750.

  Detection signals from the sensors are input to the main control board 710.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display substrate 768 is connected to an output interface of the panel relay terminal board 750 via a symbol limiting resistor substrate 766. Thereby, the main control board 710 can output drive signals to the normal symbol display 82, the first special symbol display 84, and the second special symbol display 86.

  Also, the output interface of the switchgear relay terminal plate 754 is connected with a normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and a jackpot game switchgear solenoid 778. From the main control board 710, the normal electric player solenoid 774 and the jackpot game are connected. A drive signal is output toward the open / close device open / close solenoid 778. Note that the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 drives a pair of movable pieces 606 provided above the third starting port 604, and the jackpot gaming switchgear solenoid 778 is a jackpot gaming switchgear 500 (more specifically, Specifically, the big winning game opening / closing door 500b) is driven.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 720 includes a CPU 722 as a central processing unit, a ROM 724 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 726 as a readable / writable memory.

  Then, the payout control board 720 processes the command signal input from the main control board 710 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 53 and the launching device 57 including the launching handle and the firing motor. Thereby, the ball payout device 53 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch device 57 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Also connected to the input interface of the payout control board 720 are an inner frame opening switch 736 for detecting the opening state of the front frame (not shown) of the main body frame 3 and a door opening switch 738 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5. Has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 710 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 720 to the main control board 710.

  The payout control board 720 is also connected to a tray full tank switch 730 for detecting that the game balls stored in the dish 360 are full. “Please remove from 360”.

  An external terminal board 56 is connected to the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720. Various information such as a winning state at each start opening 600, 602, 604, a variation state of a normal symbol / special symbol, and a gaming state based on a lottery result are provided in a hall provided in a gaming facility via the external terminal board 56. Output to a computer or the like.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 800 includes a peripheral control substrate 810 and a display device control substrate 816 as shown in FIG. Note that communication in only one direction is performed between the output interface and the input interface between the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810. That is, even if a command is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, no command is transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 to the main control board 710. Further, the operating power supplied to the peripheral board 800 is supplied via the main control board 710.

  The peripheral control board 810 also includes electronic components such as a CPU 811, ROM 812, and RAM 813, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 810 includes a ROM 819 that stores sound sources that are the basis for effect sounds and musical effects such as music, and effects such as sound effects and music that are based on the contents of the effects based on the sound sources stored in the ROM 819. A sound source IC 818 that outputs sound is provided.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 810 and the display device control board 816 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 816. The display device control board 816 processes the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 and outputs a drive signal to the effect display device 115. Note that the display device control board 816 includes a CPU 832, a RAM 834, a ROM 836, a VDP 838, and an image ROM 839.

  The CPU 832 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 810 via the input / output interface, performs arithmetic processing based on the command, and controls the VDP 838.

  The RAM 834 provides a work area for the CPU 832 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 836 holds a program for the CPU 832 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 838 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 838, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 838, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 832 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode on the effect display device 115 can be changed variously.

  The image ROM 839 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  As described above, the peripheral board 800 (peripheral control board 810 and display device control board 816) performs effect control for an image displayed on the effect display device 115, including a variable display effect for a decorative symbol 1153 described later. It is a part to do.

  Further, a lamp driving board 850 and a frame decoration relay terminal board 240 are connected to the peripheral control board 810.

  A panel decoration lamp 852 and a center decoration lamp 853 are connected to the output interface of the lamp driving board 850. Thereby, the lamp drive board 850 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps. Further, a discharge port detection sensor 854 that detects a game ball discharged to the rear side of the game board 4 (that is, an out ball) is connected to the input interface of the lamp drive board 850.

  The frame decoration relay terminal board 240 connected to the peripheral control board 810 is connected to speakers 144 and 341 connected to the door frame 5, operation buttons 327, a frame decoration lamp 842, and the like. In other words, the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 is switched based on the operation state of the operation button 327 and a drive signal is output to the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, functional configurations of the main control board 710 constituting the main board 700 of the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control board 810 constituting the peripheral board 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main control board and the peripheral control board.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the main control board 710 includes a gaming state control means 934, a first special symbol lottery means 900, a first special symbol display control means 702, a first special symbol hold display control means 930, First special symbol hold counter 903, second special symbol lottery means 910, second special symbol display control means 704, second special symbol hold display control means 932, second special symbol hold counter 913, hold order Storage means 940, success / failure determination random number storage area 5131, processing area 5132, big hit game execution means 715, small hit game execution means 714, opening / closing operation control means 938, normal symbol lottery means 920, normal symbol Display control means 716, normal symbol hold display control means 718, normal symbol hold means 923, movable piece opening / closing control means 928, command transmission means 94 It has a, and.

  The gaming state control means 934 determines which gaming state the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is, and controls the gaming state based on the determined gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is an external game state in which the game state can be grasped from the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and the player is more external than the external normal game state (normal game state) and this external normal game state. The game state is controlled to any one of the external advantageous game states (chance game state) that is advantageous to the game.

  The external normal game state is a game state in which a later-described opening extension function (so-called time-shortening function) is not activated, and is a game state in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are not controlled in a later-described promotion mode. That is, as will be described later, the pair of movable pieces 606 opens and closes when triggered by the lottery process by the normal symbol lottery means 920, and thereby, the winning probability of the game ball to the third start port 604 As the operation mode when the movable piece 606 operates, the first operation mode and the second operation mode (promotion mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation mode are provided. And are prepared. Of these, in the external normal gaming state, the first operation mode is adopted as the operation mode when the movable piece 606 operates. In addition, this 1st operation | movement aspect is an aspect in which the winning of a game ball to the said 3rd starting port 604 is hard to be promoted, for example, the aspect by which the 3rd starting port 604 is maintained in a closed state, or A mode in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened to the extent that they do not affect the winning of the game ball as compared to the case where the third start port 604 is maintained in the closed state (ie, even if the movable pieces 606 are opened and closed) This is a mode in which the winning frequency at the third start port 604 is substantially the same as when the closed state is maintained. “To the extent that it does not affect the winning of the game ball” is almost equivalent to the case where the winning frequency at the third start port 604 is maintained in the closed state even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. That is, even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened, it means that the winning of the game ball to the third starting port 604 is hardly promoted.

  On the other hand, the external advantageous game state is a game state in which an opening extension function to be described later operates, and a game in which the second operation mode (promotion mode) is adopted as an operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 operate. State. Here, the “promotion mode” is a mode in which winning of the game ball to the third starting port 604 is promoted, and for example, a mode in which a longer time is adopted as the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606. It is. That is, the “promotion mode” means that the winning probability in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 is increased, the lottery time by the normal symbol lottery means 920 is shortened (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened), and the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606. Up is equivalent. However, it is good also as a promotion aspect by performing only any one or two among these three aspects, and is good also as a promotion aspect by performing all three.

  In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 includes an internally controlled gaming state that is difficult to grasp from the appearance. In the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a later-described probability changing function (so-called probability variation function) operates and a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate correspond to it.

  When the probability variation function is not activated, the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 performs the lottery process with a predetermined low probability (first probability) of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when the probability changing function is activated, the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 causes the probability of winning the jackpot to be at least twice as high as the first probability (in this embodiment, the first symbol lottery means 910). The lottery process is performed with a second probability (winning probability B) that is 10 times the probability of 1 (winning probability A). In this way, when the probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot is at least double that when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is activated. This is because it is possible to win a big hit at a stage where the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is small compared to the above, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

  In this embodiment, a gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is operated is referred to as “external normal gaming state A”, and a gaming state in which the opening extension function is not operated but the probability changing function is operated is referred to as “external normal gaming state B”. The game state in which the release extension function operates but the probability change function does not operate is referred to as “external advantageous game state A”, and the game state in which both the release extension function and the probability change function operate is referred to as “external advantage game state B”. Called. The above-mentioned “external normal gaming state” means both “external normal gaming state A” and “external normal gaming state B”, and the above “external advantageous gaming state” means “external advantageous gaming state” It is meant to include both “A” and “external advantageous gaming state B”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player cannot distinguish between the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B. Similarly, the external advantageous gaming state A and the external advantageous gaming state B so that the can not even distinguish. Therefore, the player determines that the game state is advantageous to him if the game is in the external advantageous game state, and determines that the game state is not advantageous to him in the normal normal game state.

  In addition, a change from any gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player is performed only when the condition device is activated. Of the four game states (external normal game state A, external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A, external advantageous game state B), the most advantageous game state for the player is external advantageous game state B. Yes, the most disadvantageous game state for the player is the external normal game state A. Accordingly, a change from the external normal game state A to another game state (external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A and external advantageous game state B), a change from the external advantageous game state A to the external advantageous game state B, etc. Is not performed unless the condition device is activated.

  The first special symbol lottery means 900, when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780 based on the winning of the first start port 600, out of the random numbers for the validity determination generated in the random number range of 0 to 652. One random number is acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquiring means 902. The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Then, when the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to be determined are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and the first special symbol determination unit 904 performs the determination. It is determined whether or not a big or small win is won.

  In the case of the external special gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 determines whether or not the randomness value is acquired by the first special symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition unit 902. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the figure determination table 906. In this embodiment, since 19 and 457 are jackpot random numbers (random numbers determined to be jackpot winning), first, whether or not the random number values acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 are these jackpot random numbers. If it is a jackpot random number, the jackpot game execution means 715 executes the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, in the case of the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 is performed by using the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the first random symbol value. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the probability variation special figure determination table 908. In this embodiment, 19, 41, 71, 97, 101, 137, 167, 181, 191, 199, 233, 263, 277, 331, 353, 373, 419, 457, 499 and 509 are jackpot random numbers. Then, it is determined whether or not the random value acquired by the first special symbol winning / determining random number acquisition means 902 is a jackpot random number, and if it is a jackpot random number, the jackpot game executing means 715 executes the jackpot game.

  When the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port sensor 784 based on the winning of the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, the second special symbol lottery means 910 The second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 acquires one random number among the special symbol success / failure determination random numbers generated with a random number range of 0 to 652 in the same manner as when the first start opening 600 is won. . The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 up to a second predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and are determined by the second special symbol determination unit 914. It is determined whether or not a big or small win is won.

  In the case of the external special gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, whether the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 914 determines whether or not the random number value acquired by the second special symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition unit 912 and the second normal special event determination unit 914 It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the figure determination table 907. Note that the jackpot random number stored in the second normal special figure determination table 907 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the first normal special figure determination table 906.

  On the other hand, in the case of the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is made by using the random number value acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 and the second It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the probability variation special figure determination table 909. The jackpot random number stored in the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the first probability variation special figure determination table 908.

  When a jackpot game is being executed, even if a game ball wins the first start port 600, the winning / nothing determination is not performed, and the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning ball is determined is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not the game is successful. At the same time, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is counted up. Further, the first normal special figure determination table 906, the second normal special figure determination table 907, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908, and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 are all stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 22). ing.

  In this way, different tables are used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. In this way, by varying the lottery process depending on which start port among the start ports 600, 602, and 604 is awarded, it is possible to increase variations in game content and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure stores a lottery order for each special symbol lottery means (that is, a lottery order by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and a lottery order by the second special symbol lottery means 910). However, the lottery order in which both are merged (that is, the order in which the game balls are detected by the start port sensors 780, 782, 784) is not stored. Order in which the game balls are detected by the start port sensors 780, 782, 784 (that is, the order in which random numbers are acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 or the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912) Is stored by the hold order storage means 940. Accordingly, the first special symbol lottery means 900 (specifically, the first special symbol determination unit 904) or the second special symbol lottery means 910 (specifically, the second special symbol lottery means 904) based on the order stored by the holding order storage means 940. The special symbol success / failure determination means 914) determines whether the acquired random numbers are correct or not (performs the determination for each random number).

  By the way, when the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is determined to be a big hit, a symbol generated by a random number range of 0 to 99 by a symbol random number acquisition means (not shown). One random number is acquired from the random numbers. And if this acquired random number value is 39-68, it will be determined as 1st long open big hit, if it is 76-99, it will be determined as 2nd long open big hit, and if it is 3-38, 3rd long open will be determined. If it is determined to be a big hit, 0 to 2 is determined to be a first short open big hit, and if it is 69 to 75, it is determined to be a second short open big hit. When the determined jackpot type is the first long open jackpot, the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won by the long open jackpot game execution means 715a is displayed. A long open jackpot (a certain amount of game balls are paid out to the player) that opens and closes the jackpot gaming opening / closing device (opening / closing device) 500 under the situation displayed on the display surface of the effect display device (effect image display device) 115. The jackpot game that is prompted) is executed. On the other hand, in the case of the first short open big hit or the second short open big hit, an effect image indicating that the big win is won is displayed on the effect display device (effect image display device) 115 by the short open big hit game execution means 715b. A short-open big hit (a big hit game in which the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is executed to open and close the big hit game opening / closing device (opening / closing device) 500 under the situation that is not displayed on the screen.

  On the other hand, if the random value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 is not a big hit random number, whether or not a small hit is determined. The determination is made by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. Specifically, in the first normal special figure determination table 906 and the first probability variation special figure determination table 908, 1, 3, 31, 211 are stored as small hit random numbers among the random numbers for success / failure determination. On the other hand, in the second normal special figure determination table 907 and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909, only three of the random numbers for the validity determination are stored as small hit random numbers. When it is determined that the acquired random numbers are these small hitting random numbers, the small hitting game execution means 714 opens and closes the jackpot gaming opening / closing device (opening / closing device) 500 by approximating the opening / closing operation of the short opening big hit. small hit game that is executed.

  In this way, in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the winning probability for the small hit is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is activated. Similarly, also in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910, the winning probability for the small hit is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is operating. However, the probability of winning a small bonus in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the probability of winning a small bonus in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 are different (first special symbol lottery). The probability of winning a small win in the lottery process by the means 900 is higher than the probability of winning a small win in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910).

  By the way, in the case of an external advantageous game state in which the opening extension function is activated, a longer time is adopted as the opening time for the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 (promotion mode). The lottery frequency by the special symbol lottery means 910 is increased (the special symbol lottery opportunities increase). In other words, the expectation of winning the jackpot increases as the special symbol lottery opportunities increase as compared to the case of the external normal gaming state. Therefore, by making the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the player The winning frequency for small hits with small profits will be reduced. Thereby, the troublesomeness resulting from frequent winning of small hits can be reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the external normal game state A where the opening extension function does not operate, for example, a longer time is not adopted as the opening time for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 606. There are fewer lottery opportunities for special symbols compared to the gaming state in which. Here, since the small hit game and the second short open big hit game are very similar to each other, it is expected that the probability variation function will be activated by increasing the frequency of winning the small hit. The frequency of giving increases, and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

  In this way, by making the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, In any gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as described above, whether the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the second special symbol lottery means 910 are successful or not is determined by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 being released. Based on. The release condition in the present embodiment is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but is not limited thereto. For example, when a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained is determined, the determination result may be stored until the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

  The result of the determination by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is determined by the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display control unit 704 by the first special symbol display control unit 702 or the second special symbol display control unit 704. 2 is displayed on the special symbol display device 86. However, since the display is displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs, it is difficult for the player to grasp the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determination unit 914. .

  The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 is set by the first special symbol hold display control means 930 or the second special symbol hold display control means 932, respectively. It is displayed on the display 88 or the second special symbol hold display 90.

  The jackpot game execution means 715 and the jackpot game execution means 714 execute the jackpot game or the jackpot game based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. Here, the big hit game is a game with the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit game is a game without the operation of the conditional device.

  The condition device operates only when the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, and from one gaming state to the one gaming state. A change (transition) to a gaming state advantageous to the player is possible only when the condition device is activated. For example, a change (transition) from the external normal gaming state A to the external normal gaming state B is a condition that the condition device operates. Therefore, when the small hit game is executed, the game state does not change. For example, when the small hit game is executed in the external normal game state A, the external normal game state A continues and the external normal game is executed. Even if the small hit game is executed in the state B, the external normal game state B continues.

  Note that a change (transition) from one gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the one gaming state is not only the operation of the condition device, but also a gaming state changing lottery (from one gaming state to the one gaming state). In the case of winning a lottery (whether or not to change to a disadvantaged gaming state by the player than the gaming state of), or when a special symbol change is performed a certain number of times is there. Therefore, for example, the change (transition) from the external normal gaming state B to the external normal gaming state A, the change (transition) from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A, etc. are cases where the condition device does not operate. May also be performed when the other conditions described above are satisfied.

  If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, the jackpot game execution means 715 is operated by the opening / closing operation control means 938 to open / close the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778. Is operated to open and close the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 to execute the jackpot game.

  More specifically, as a type of jackpot game, a long-open jackpot game in which the maximum opening time (for example, 30 sec) of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is relatively long, and a maximum opening time of the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 (for example, 0) .6 sec) is a relatively short short-open big hit game. If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit, the big hit game execution means The long open jackpot game execution means 715a as 715 executes the long open jackpot game. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the first short open big hit or the second short open big hit, the short as the big hit game execution means 715 The open big hit game execution means 715b executes the short open big hit game.

  Here, the long open jackpot game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 938 for 15 rounds. The short open jackpot game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 938 for two rounds. When a game ball wins the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500, the opening / closing device count sensor 776 counts the number of winning balls. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls as prize balls are paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the tray by the payout control board 720.

  Note that the types of jackpot games are not limited to long-open jackpots and short-open jackpots, and the maximum opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is substantially the same (for example, 30 seconds), but the maximum number of opening times is There may be a relatively large jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and a jackpot (for example, two rounds) with a relatively small maximum number of times of opening. Further, the maximum number of times of opening is almost the same (for example, 15 rounds), but the maximum opening time of the jackpot gaming switch 500 is relatively long (for example, 30 seconds). It may be a relatively short hit (for example, 0.3 sec).

  Here, the “round” is an opening / closing operation unit of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 at the time of the jackpot game. After the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is opened, a closing condition is established from the opened state and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is used. It is one round until the switchgear 500 is closed. The closing condition is that a predetermined time elapses after the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that the maximum number of winning game balls wins the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is closed.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the closing conditions at the time of a long open big hit game and the closing conditions at the time of a short open game are different. The closing condition in the long open jackpot game is that 30 seconds elapse after the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that nine game balls win. On the other hand, the closing condition in the short-open big hit game is that 0.6 sec has passed since the big hit game opening / closing device 500 opened, or that three game balls win.

  The closing conditions of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 are not limited to these. However, at the time of a long open big hit game, the maximum number of winning game balls can be won in the big hit game opening / closing device 500 until a predetermined time elapses after the big hit game opening / closing device 500 is opened. it is preferred that the closed condition is set. On the other hand, in the case of a short-open big hit game, the closing condition is set so that one or two game balls can barely win the big hit game open / close device 500 while the big hit game open / close device 500 is open. It is preferred that

  Thus, even if the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is a long open jackpot and a short open jackpot The profits given to the players are greatly different. That is, when the winning jackpot type is the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit, a large number of game balls can win the big hit game opening / closing device 500. On the other hand, when the winning jackpot type is the first short-open big hit or the second short-open big jackpot, the single hit or two game balls can barely win the jackpot game opening / closing device 500. Thereby, the profit given to the player is greatly different between the case where the long open jackpot game is executed and the case where the short open jackpot game is executed.

  If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a small hit, the small hit game execution means 714 is similar (approximate) to the short open big hit game. Thus, a small hit game is performed in which the big hit game opening / closing device 500 is opened and closed. The “similarity (approximate) mode” includes both the mode that is exactly the same as the short open jackpot game and the mode that is very similar to the short open jackpot game.

  In addition, the “very similar aspect” is an aspect similar to the extent that the player cannot determine whether it is a short open big hit or a small hit simply by visually recognizing the open form of the big hit game opening / closing device 500. Means that. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 914 is a small hit, the game is performed after the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 is opened. The opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is performed twice under the condition that 6 seconds have passed or three game balls are won (opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 during the jackpot game) The unit is referred to as “round”, whereas the opening / closing operation unit of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 in the small hit game is referred to as “times”).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 and the sound effect and effect sound output from the speakers 144 and 341 are the short opening based on the end of the small hit game and the second short opening big hit. They are very similar to each other when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not include a state notification unit such as a state notification lamp for notifying which gaming state the internal gaming state is (a general gaming machine has a state notification lamp). Therefore, the internal game state (whether or not the probability changing function is activated) is not notified at all (in fact, the player may not even know the existence of the external normal game state B). Thereby, even if the player notices that the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 has been performed, the player grasps whether it is based on the second short-opening jackpot or the jackpot (In a general gaming machine in which the gaming state is notified, when the short open big hit game is executed, the probability changing function is activated, and it is notified that the probability changing function is activated). In addition, since the opening extension function operates after the short opening jackpot game based on the first short opening jackpot is completed, it can be understood that the game was the first short opening jackpot game. Further, “very similar” means not only the same thing but also a very similar thing.

  In this way, in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910, even when the big win is not won, it is possible to have a sense of expectation to win the big hit.

  Further, the big win determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is performed separately from the determination of whether or not the big hit is successful. Here, if the winning / losing determination for the big win is made prior to the determining whether or not the big winning is made, the winning of the big winning will not be performed if the winning is made for the small win. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the big win and the small win do not win simultaneously, it is assumed that the big win determination is made first prior to the small win determination in such a gaming machine. Then, when winning the jackpot, the opportunity to win the jackpot is lost. Accordingly, by determining whether or not the jackpot is successful prior to determining whether or not the jackpot is successful, whether or not the jackpot is determined in all the special symbols drawn by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 is determined. As a result, the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that it is possible to win the big win and the small win, but in this case, it is necessary to decide which win should be given priority, which is complicated in terms of control. Therefore, as in this embodiment, the control complexity can be avoided by determining whether or not to win the jackpot only when the jackpot is not won. Furthermore, two lottery opportunities for determining whether or not to win a jackpot and determining whether or not to win a jackpot are given, and the player can be given a feeling of feeling, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the winning probability for the jackpot is set higher than the winning probability for the jackpot, and it is impossible to grasp whether the small hit game or the short open jackpot game is being executed. Therefore, when the player is in the external normal gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, every time he / she wins a small win, an expectation that the player may have won a short open big win that may cause the probability variation function to operate. It can have a feeling and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, by giving the player a sense of expectation that is changed from the external normal gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A to the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the player cannot stop stopping the game. As a result, the operation rate of the pachinko machine is improved, and a profit is also provided for the game shop.

  On the other hand, even if a small hit or short open big hit is won in the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B is continued (that is, the probability changing function of Since the operation continues), a sense of security can be given to the player. That is, in the external normal game state B or the external advantageous game state B, even if the opening / closing operation of the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 is performed twice (or two rounds), the external normal game state A or the external advantageous game state A is entered. Since it is not changed, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the same special table need not be used as the table used for the determination of the success / failure by the first special symbol determination unit 904 and the second special symbol determination unit 914. The first special symbol determination unit 904 and the second special symbol determination unit 904 are not necessarily used. Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 914. In this case, the winning probability in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 may be different from the winning probability in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. Furthermore, a mode (for example, given to a player) is different between the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which profits differ.

  Next, lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 will be described.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 612 and is detected by the gate sensor 760, the normal symbol lottery means 920 obtains one random number among the normal symbol appropriateness determination random numbers generated in the random number range of 0 to 250 as the normal symbol. It is acquired by the random number acquisition means 922 for determining whether or not it is correct. The acquired random number is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by a normal symbol holding means 923 having a storage area for storing the acquired random number and a normal symbol holding counter for storing the number of the acquired random numbers as a counter value. Deferred. When the normal symbol holding means 923 cancels the hold, the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 determines whether or not the normal symbol is determined.

  In the normal normal game state, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination unit 922 and the normal general symbol determination table 926. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934. In this embodiment, since 246 to 250 are hit random numbers, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4000 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (normal mode).

  On the other hand, in the case of an external advantageous game state, the success / failure determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 924 is performed based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination / rejection determination random number acquisition unit 922 and the open extended general symbol determination table 927. As described above, the game state control means 934 controls the game. In the present embodiment, since 1 to 250 is a hit random number, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1024 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 executes the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 1300 msec three times and the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 856 msec twice (promotion mode).

  As described above, when the game is in the external advantageous game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the third start port 604 is dramatically improved as compared to the case of the external normal game state. Therefore, in the case of an external advantageous game state, the number of special symbol lottery opportunities increases dramatically, and a sense of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed increases, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Here, the normal map determination table 926 and the open extended map determination table 927 are both stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 22).

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined to be a win even in the external normal gaming state, and the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 can be executed. Thus, the hit probability may be zero when in the external normal gaming state. That is, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 may be performed only in the external advantageous gaming state.

  The determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 924 is displayed on the normal symbol display 82 by the normal symbol display control unit 716. Also, the number of holds by the normal symbol holding means 923 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 718.

  The movable piece opening / closing control means 928 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 606 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 is winning. However, as described above, the opening / closing operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is different between the case of the external advantageous gaming state and the case of the external normal gaming state (in the case of the external advantageous gaming state, the third start The winning of the game ball to the mouth 604 is made easier than in the case of the external normal game state).

  In the present embodiment, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is impossible to win a game ball in the third starting port 604, and the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. Thus, the winning of the game ball to the third start port 604 is easier than the winning of the game ball to the first start port 600 and the second start port 602. However, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is not limited to a mode in which winning of the game ball to the third start port 604 is impossible, and winning of the game ball to the third start port 604 is the first start. It may be more difficult than winning a game ball to the mouth 600 or the second start port 602.

  The command transmission unit 946 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 800. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to a variation time of the decorative symbol performed in the effect display device 115.

  It should be noted that the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904, the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914, and the normal symbol success / failure determination means 924 does not necessarily include a deviation. For example, if a small hit game is executed in a manner in which it is extremely difficult to win a game ball to the big hit game opening / closing device 500, if the big hit is not won, all of the winning points may be won. good.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, in the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination / non-permission determination unit 914, the determination of success / failure of jackpot is made prior to the determination of success / failure of jackpot, as described above. Although a remarkable effect is brought about, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is successful and the determination of whether or not the jackpot can be performed collectively.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 810 includes command receiving means 950, effect lottery means 960, and effect control means 962, as shown in FIG.

  The command receiving unit 950 is a part that receives the determination result by the first special symbol admission / rejection determination unit 904 or the second special symbol adequacy determination unit 914 transmitted from the main control board 710 and information related to the determination result.

  The effect lottery means 960, as will be described later, produces an effect mode to be displayed on the effect display device 115 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 710 and sound effects and music output from the speakers 144 and 341. Etc., and the display mode of each lamp 842, 852, 853, and the like.

  The effect control unit 962 is a part that transmits information to the display device control board 816 so that the effect mode determined by the effect lottery unit 960 is displayed on the effect display device 115. In addition, the effect sound and the display are controlled via the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 so that the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842 are output and displayed. Further, the display on the panel decoration lamp 852 and the center decoration lamp 853 is also controlled via the lamp driving board 850.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 700 according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main system processing executed by the CPU mounted on the main control board of the main board.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 711 (see FIG. 22) executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (see FIG. 22) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM 713 (data memory) of this embodiment has a backup area in which various control data are backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the processing area of the RAM 713 to the backup area, and the temporarily saved data when the power is restored. Is read out to the processing area of the RAM 713, so that a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the process of returning to the power supply stop state according to the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (power recovery) Time processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is deleted. After that, in the RAM 713, various control data necessary for the progress of the game such as jackpot winning probability and control data indicating the current game state are written with respective initial parameters (initialization). processing). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  The current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810, and the display on the effect display device 115 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM 713 of the main control board 710, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 after power recovery, so that even if there is a power failure, The game state displayed on the effect display device 115 can be matched (the peripheral control board 810 does not store the game state at the time of power failure). By the way, with respect to the current gaming state, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol of the effect display device 115 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern described later at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol. The information of the command is transmitted. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 810 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM erase switch that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is on. That is, even when this RAM erase switch is on, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the game progress, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current game state, are written in the processing area of the RAM 713 with respective initial parameters. Processing). In the state in which such initialization processing has been performed (at the initial time), the control data indicating the jackpot winning probability shows the first probability (winning probability A), which indicates the current gaming state. The control data indicates an “external normal gaming state A” which is a gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is activated. Therefore, if the pair of movable pieces 606 may operate at the time of initializing, the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (normal mode).

  Further, in the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 710 (see FIG. 22) is activated when such an initialization process is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 810 (FIG. 22). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 810 that the main control board 710 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 713, and the power supply is started when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 711 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 710 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 710 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

  The process at the time of the power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “recovery”). This is a process of temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM 713 when a power failure occurs in order to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing at the time of power-off occurrence. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 711 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum in the processing area of the RAM 713 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored in the backup area of the RAM 713 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 713 before the power failure are properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 711 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 713 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 711 prohibits access to the RAM 713 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to an extremely short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 711 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, a power interruption occurrence process is entered due to a momentary power interruption, and even when the infinite loop shown in FIG. 26 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 711 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Instead of the backup area of the RAM 713, a rewritable nonvolatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 713 may be a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM 713 to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 of the main board 700 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 711 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, detection signals from the various sensors described above (gate sensor 760, first start port sensor 780, second start port sensor 782, third start port sensor 784, opening / closing device count sensor 776, etc.) are used. Execute the process to be monitored.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 720 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 760 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing opening / closing control of the movable piece 606 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process of step S100, a series of processing from the start of variation of the special symbol to the start of the winning game is executed, and opening / closing control of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 as the special electric accessory is performed. Perform the process to do.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 810 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 711 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, random numbers for success / failure determination, design random numbers, random numbers for reach determination (more strictly speaking, random numbers for high expectation effect determination), variation pattern random numbers, and random numbers for normal design success / failure determination Etc.

  The success / failure determination random number is a success / failure determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game or a small hit game. When the design random number is determined to generate a jackpot game, the type of jackpot (first long opening jackpot, second long opening jackpot, third long opening jackpot, first short opening jackpot and second short opening jackpot) It is a random number used for the determination of. The reach determination random number is used to determine whether or not a high expectation effect such as a reach effect is to be performed when it is determined that neither a big win nor a small win has been won (ie, missed). It is a random number. The variation pattern random number is a random number used for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86. The normal symbol determination random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be in an open state.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern of the decorative design that is display-controlled by the effect display device 115 may be determined by a variation pattern random number, and is mounted on the CPU 811 mounted on the peripheral control board 810 of the peripheral board 800 or the display control board 816. It may be determined by the CPU 832 (see FIG. 23). The variation pattern random number is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number.

  Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 in an open state in which it is easy to accept a winning / decision random number, a design random number, and a game ball related to the occurrence of the big hit game or the small hit game The random number for judgment per ordinary symbol related to crab is updated. Here, the random numbers used for determining whether or not the big hit game is generated and whether or not the pair of movable pieces 606 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability determined to generate a big hit game or a small hit game, probability to control a pair of movable pieces 606 to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number is made constant. (That is, it is possible to prevent the probability from being biased by aiming or the like), and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the variation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of the winning game and the display result of the normal symbol are updated. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 710 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update process, when the counter for updating the random number for determining whether or not the circuit has made one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring the random number for determination of success / failure, there are provided two means: a first special symbol determination / random determination acquisition means 902 and a second special symbol determination / random determination acquisition means 912. However, only one of these may be provided.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 600, the second start port 602, and the third start port 604, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first, second, and third start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (in step S120). YES) A variation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether to start the big hit game or the small hit game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is set to the variation pattern. A correspondingly set fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is made in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined that the big hit is made, the process selection flag is set to “4”. , And if neither the big hit or the small win is determined, the processing selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type (long open jackpot or short open jackpot) is determined, and the number of rounds, the opening time, and the game for controlling the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming switching device 500 according to the jackpot type The number of balls to be awarded is set and the processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game process, the number of releases and the release time for controlling the opening operation of the big hit game opening / closing device 500 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is controlled based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot gaming start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls to be won. When the game is over, it is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function and the time shortening function, and a process of updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the special electric accessory small hit control process (step S250) is executed. In the special electric accessory small hitting control process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the big hit game opening / closing device 500 is controlled based on the number of opening times, the opening time and the limited number set in the small hitting game process (step S220). When the small hit game ends, processing for updating the processing flag to “0” is performed. Note that the small hit game is not a game accompanied by the operation of the condition device like the big hit game, but as described above, it is a game that is very similar to the short open big hit game that is a kind of the big hit game.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd starting opening prize process]
Next, the first, second, and third start opening prize winning processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up winning process.

  In the first, second, and third starting opening winning process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second starting opening 602 or the third starting opening 604 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of game ball detection by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port 784 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port sensor 784, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604 (YES in step S1101). ). If there is no detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 782 and the third start port sensor 784, no game ball is won in any of the second start port 602 and the third start port 604 (in step S1101). NO).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that the game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, various data (random determination random numbers acquired by the second special symbol determination random number acquisition means 912, symbol random numbers). , Special symbol type). Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 711 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103), and then proceeds to step S1104. move on. Second hold storage process, various data acquired by the game ball is finished in the second start hole 602 stores (spruce determining random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) to the propriety determining random number storage area 5131, This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913. Incidentally, spruce determining random number storage area 5131, spruce determining random number storage area has a symbol random number storage area and the special symbol type storage area, the game ball is finished in the second start hole 602 or the third start hole 604 Various data acquired by doing so are stored in the respective storage areas.

  CPU711 is, when any even game ball of the second start hole 602 and the third start hole 604 is determined not to be winning in step S1101 (NO in step S1101), and, second special symbol reservation counter at step S1102 When it is determined that the counter value of 913 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 711 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 600 (step S1104). Specifically, the presence / absence of game ball detection by the first start port sensor 780 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 600 (YES in step S1104). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that no game ball has won a prize at the first start port 600 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that the game ball has won the first starting port 600, various random numbers (random determination random numbers, symbol random numbers, special symbol types acquired by the first special symbol determination random number acquisition means 902) are used. It is acquired and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 711 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106), and the first and second -The third starting entrance prize process is terminated. First hold storage process, various data acquired by the game ball is finished in the first start hole 600 stores (spruce determining random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) to the propriety determining random number storage area 5131, This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903. In addition, various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 600 are determined as pass / fail as well as various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604. It is stored in each storage area in the random number storage area 5131 for use.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S1104 that a game ball has not won the first starting port 600 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is an upper limit value of 4. Are determined (NO in step S1105), the first, second, and third start opening prize winning processes are terminated.

  If the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 913 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604 in step S1102, the various data acquired in step S1101 are stored. Discard. Similarly, if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the first starting port 600 in step S1105, the various data acquired in step S1104 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, it is not always necessary to acquire various data (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) in step S1101. However, it may be performed between step S1101 to step S1103. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1101, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1103 You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when the game ball to the first start hole 600 is determined to have won, various data (spruce determining random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquisition of is not necessarily performed in step S1104, step S1104~ What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1106 You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (step S1101-step S1103) to the 2nd starting port 602 or the 3rd starting port 604, the winning process (step S1104-) to the 1st starting port 600 is performed. 1106). However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 600 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604 may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 600, the lottery processing is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900, and when the second start opening 602 or the third start opening 604 wins, Although the lottery process is performed by the 2 special symbol lottery means 910, it is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball is won at the first start port 600 or the third start port 602, the lottery processing is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900, and when the game ball is won at the second start port 602, the second special symbol lottery means is performed. A lottery process may be performed according to 910. Furthermore, special symbol lottery means may be provided corresponding to each of the start ports 600, 602, and 604 (that is, corresponding to the first special symbol lottery unit corresponding to the first start port and the second start port). Second special symbol lottery means and third special symbol lottery means corresponding to the third start port may be provided).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even if any of the lottery process by the 1st special symbol lottery means 900 and the lottery process by the 2nd special symbol lottery means 910 is performed, the winning probability to the jackpot is the same. It is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 are different. good.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a bonus is awarded to a player when winning a jackpot in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and when winning a jackpot in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910. There is no difference in the profits made, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is performed, the probability that the first long open big hit game is executed is set relatively high, while the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is performed. When the process is performed, the probability that the first long open jackpot game is executed is set to be relatively low.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 711 first sets the number of random numbers (starting storage number) stored in the random number storage area 5131 for validity determination to be zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1301). If the starting storage number stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is 0, it means that the counter values of the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 are both 0. .

  If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), a shift process of the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is performed (step S1302). This shift process is a process for shifting the order in which the determination of whether or not the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game balls to the start ports 600, 602, and 604 are made is performed. That is, whether or not the special symbol is successful is determined in the order in which the game balls are won in the respective start ports 600, 602, and 604, and therefore the order is shifted as the change starts. The random number acquired earliest among the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game ball at each start port 600, 602, 604 is transferred to the processing area 5132. If the start memory number is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 711 determines the type (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol) stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1303). If the type is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303), and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is decremented by one. (Step S1305), the process proceeds to step S1308. On the other hand, if the type is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1306) and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is decremented by one. (Step S1307), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the gaming state (external normal gaming state B or external advantageous gaming state B) in which the probability changing function is operating (step S1308). Here, if the gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (YES in step S1308), the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 or the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 is selected (step S1309). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is in the ON state, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is in the ON state, the second probability variation special symbol determination table 909 is selected. The

  On the other hand, if the probability changing function is not activated in step S1308 (NO in step S1308), the first normal special figure determination table 906 or the second normal special figure determination table 907 is selected (step S1310). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is ON, the first normal special symbol determination table 906 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is ON, the second normal special symbol determination table 907 is selected. The

  Then, the determination is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311).

  Note that the jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 904 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 914.

  If it is determined in step S1311 that the game is a big hit (YES in step S1311), the type of jackpot is determined based on the acquired symbol random number (step S1312). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned on (step S1313). Specifically, the first long open jackpots flag if the first long open jackpots to ON state, and the second long open jackpots flag to ON state when the second long open jackpots, there third length open jackpot For example, the third long open big hit flag is turned on, the first short open big hit flag is turned on if it is the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit flag is turned on if it is the second short open big hit. . Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “1” (step S1316), and the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a big win in step S1311 (NO in step S1311), it is determined whether or not it is a small win (step S1314). Here, if it is determined that the small hit is won (YES in step S1314), the small hit flag is turned on (step S1315), the process proceeds to step S1316, the processing flag is updated to “1”, The variation start process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1314 that the winning combination is not won (NO in step S1314), the process proceeds to step S1316, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the shift process is performed in step S1302, whether or not the determination is correct is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132. Although it is performed (step S1311), it is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the determination is successful based on the determination table and the random number stored first in the determination random number storage area 5131, and the shift process may be performed. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the validity determination random number storage area 5131 can be referred to only when the change starts.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to the determination result. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of a plurality of types of jackpots is in an ON state, or whether or not a jackpot flag is in an ON state (step S1510). If the big hit flag or the small hit flag is in the ON state (YES in step S1510), hit variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S1520), and then variation pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  If neither the big hit flag nor the small win flag is ON in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect) with a high degree of expectation for winning the big win should be performed. (Step S1530). Here, if it is determined that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is to be performed (YES in step S1530), a high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then the variation Pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1530 that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot should not be performed (NO in step S1530), a low-expectation variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1550), and then A variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  The decision as to whether or not to perform a high-expected production is judged to be a high-expected production if the high-expected production lottery is won, and a high-expected production is not performed if the high-expected production lottery is lost. It is judged. In high expected effect random obtains the aforementioned reach determining random number upon a winning each starting opening 600, 602, 604, spruce determination random number if it is off, the variation of symbols is started, the acquisition This is done by determining whether the reach reach random number is correct. Here, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery varies depending on whether or not the opening extension function is activated. Furthermore, when the open extension function is not activated, the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery also depends on the counter value (so-called number of holds) by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913.

  Speaking in more detail about the probability of winning the high-expected performance lottery, when the opening extension function is not activated (that is, in the case of the external normal gaming state) and the fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, If the counter value of one special symbol hold counter 903 is 0, it is 10.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 1, it is 1/12, and the counter of the first special symbol hold counter 903 If the value is 2, it is 13.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, it is 1/15. In addition, when the opening extension function is not activated (that is, in the case of an external normal game state) and the change is a change of the second special symbol, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is the second special draw. If the counter value of the symbol hold counter 913 is 0, it is 10.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 1, it is 1/12, and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is If it is 2, 13.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, it will be 1/15. Note that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 are counter values after being subtracted upon the change.

  In addition, when the open extension function is activated (that is, in the case of an external advantageous game state), regardless of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913, it is won for the high expectation effect lottery. The probability of doing is always 1/14. Thus, in this embodiment, when the open extension function is activated and when the open extension function is not activated, the probability that a high expectation production with a high degree of expectation for jackpot will be performed is similar. It is said that. As a result, it is possible to avoid repeatedly performing only effects (such as non-reach effects) with low expectation of winning the jackpot, and the jackpot is won unfortunately in an external advantageous gaming state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed by the time, the interest of the game is suitably maintained.

  Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1560, the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1570), and the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1580). For example, if it is determined that the variation pattern is the variation number 10, the command 0AH corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation number 10 is set as an effect command, and 43000 msec is set as the variation time value in the timer. Even if the determined variation pattern is another variation pattern, a command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set as an effect command, as in the case where the variation pattern of variation number 10 is determined, A variation time value corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1590), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In addition, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is not limited to the above description. That is, when the open extension function is not activated, the probability of winning the high-expected performance lottery is always constant regardless of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913. Anyway. On the other hand, when the open extension function is activated, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is not uniform, but varies depending on the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913. Also good.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern set in this variation pattern setting process, it is displayed by a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

  Next, the hit variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 33 is a list chart showing variation patterns for each variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process. 33 in the winning column in FIG. 33 means long open jackpot, ○ means short open jackpot, Δ means small hit, and x means miss.

  In the hit variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 32, first, the CPU 711 determines whether or not it is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (step S15201). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal gaming state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S15201), it is determined whether or not the first long opening jackpot flag is ON (step S15202). If it is determined in step S15202 that the first long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15202), one of the variation pattern tables A1 to A3 shown in FIG. 33 is selected (step S15203). The hit variation pattern table setting process ends.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, a total number “1000” of table selection random numbers is associated with each of the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2. In selecting the variation pattern table, one of the selection random numbers is acquired, and one of the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2 is acquired based on the acquired selection random number. I am trying to select it. Therefore, in the variation pattern table selection process in step S15203, as shown in FIG. 33, the variation pattern table A1 is selected with a probability of 820/1000, and the variation pattern table A2 is selected with a probability of 175/1000. The variation pattern table A3 is selected with a probability of 5/1000. Of these tables A1 to A3, table A2 is a table on which the above-described continuous effects are performed. The table selection random number may be used in combination with other random numbers.

  If it is determined in step S15202 that the first long open jackpot flag is not ON (NO in step S15202), it is determined whether the second long open jackpot flag or the third long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15204). If it is determined in step S15204 that the second long open jackpot flag or the third long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15204), the variation pattern table A1 or variation pattern table A2 shown in FIG. 33 is selected (step S15205). ), The winning variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the variation pattern table A1 is selected with a probability of 825/1000 and the variation pattern table A2 is selected with a probability of 175/1000, as shown in FIG. .

  If it is determined in step S15204 that neither the second long open jackpot flag nor the third long open jackpot flag is ON (NO in step S15204), whether or not the first short open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (step S13206). In step S15206 when the first short open jackpot flag or second short open jackpots flag is judged to be ON (YES in step S15206), always select the change pattern table A4 shown in FIG. 33 (step S15207), per change The pattern table setting process ends.

  The first short open jackpots flag and the second one is also ON judged not a short open jackpot flag in step S15206 (NO in step S15206), always select the change pattern table K1 shown in FIG. 33 (step S15208), per The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Further, CPU 711 is not a foreign normal gaming state in step S15201 when it is determined that (i.e. open extension function external advantageously a gaming state in which the operating) (NO in step S15201), the first length open jackpot flag or second It is determined whether or not the long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15209). In step S15209 when the first long open jackpot flag or second long opening jackpots flag is judged to be ON (YES in step S15209), then select the variation pattern table A5 or variation pattern table A6 shown in FIG. 33 (step S15210 ), The winning variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the selection of the variation pattern table in step S15210 selects the variation pattern table A5 with a probability of 335/1000 and selects the variation pattern table A6 with a probability of 665/1000. .

  If it is determined in step S15209 that neither the first long open jackpot flag nor the second long open jackpot flag is ON (NO in step S15209), it is determined whether the third long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15211). ). If it is determined in step S15211 that the third long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15211), the fluctuation pattern table A6 shown in FIG. 33 is always selected (step S15212), and the winning fluctuation pattern table setting process is terminated. .

  If it is determined in step S15211 that the third long open jackpot flag is not ON (NO in step S15211), it is determined whether the first short open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag is ON (step S15213). If it is determined in step S15213 that the first short open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15213), the fluctuation pattern table A7 shown in FIG. 33 is always selected (step S15214), and the win fluctuation The pattern table setting process ends.

  The first short open jackpots flag and the second one is also ON judged not a short open jackpot flag in step S15213 (NO in step S15213), always select the change pattern table K2 shown in FIG. 33 (step S15215), per The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Next, the high expectation deviating variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the high-expected variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 35 is a list chart showing a variation pattern for each variation pattern table set in the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process. In the winning column in FIG. 35, “落” means a long open jackpot, “短” means a short open jackpot, “Δ” means a small jackpot, and “x” means a miss.

  34, first, the CPU 711 determines whether or not it is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (step S 15401). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal game state (the open extension function is not activated) (YES in step S 15401), one of the variation pattern tables H 1 to H 4 shown in FIG. 35 is selected (step S 15401). S15402), the high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 35, a total number “1000” of table selection random numbers is associated with each of the variation pattern tables H1 to H5. In selecting the variation pattern table, one of the selection random numbers is acquired, and one of the variation pattern tables H1 to H5 is selected based on the acquired selection random number. ing. Therefore, in the variation pattern table selection process in step S15402, as shown in FIG. 35, the variation pattern table H1 is selected with a probability of 820/1000, and the variation pattern table H2 is selected with a probability of 135/1000. The variation pattern table H3 is selected with a probability of 5/1000, and the variation pattern table H4 is selected with a probability of 40/1000.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S 15401 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the open extension function is activated) (NO in step S 15401), the variation pattern table shown in FIG. H5 is selected (step S15403), and the high disappointment variation pattern table setting process ends.

  Next, the low expectation deviating variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the low-expected variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 37 is a table showing variation patterns for each variation pattern table set in the low-expected variation pattern table setting process.

  In the low expectation / disappointment variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 36, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not the game is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (step S15501). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal game state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S15501), a continuous effect lottery is performed (step S15502). The continuous effect lottery is expected from the player even though both the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 and the result of the high expectation effect lottery are out of place. It is a lottery of whether or not to perform a continuous production that can give a feeling. In this embodiment, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not ON and the reach is not performed, the continuous effect lottery is won with a probability of 1/251. As will be described later, the continuous effect is the special symbol display 84 or 86 that is displayed only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. This is an effect (pseudo effect) that appears as if a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 to be described later have been subjected to a variable display effect multiple times.

  After continuous effect random is performed, it is determined whether the player wins a continuous effect random (step S15503), if it is determined that the player wins the continuous effect random (YES in step S15503), always shown in Figure 37 variation pattern The table H6 is selected (step S15504), and the low-expected fluctuation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S15503 that the lottery has been lost (NO in step S15503), the number of holdings, that is, the counter value by the first special symbol holding counter 903 or the second special symbol holding counter 913 (after being subtracted upon the change) Depending on the counter value, one of the variation pattern tables H7 to H9 shown in FIG. 37 is selected (step S15505), and the low-expected variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Note that the variation pattern table in step S15505 is selected when the variation is the variation of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 37, if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 0 or 1. If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 2, the change pattern table H8 is selected. If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, the change pattern table H9 is selected. Is done. Further, when the change is a change of the second special symbol, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 0 or 1, the change pattern table H7 indicates that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 2. If so, the fluctuation pattern table H8 is selected, and if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 3, the fluctuation pattern table H9 is selected. That is, the special symbol is displayed in a shorter time when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is larger than when the number is smaller.

  Further, CPU 711, when it is judged not to be the external normal gaming state in step S15501 (i.e. open extension function is external advantageous gaming state in which the operating) (NO in step S15501), the number of pending, namely first special symbol reserved The variation pattern table H10 or the variation pattern table H11 shown in FIG. 37 is selected according to the counter value (the counter value after subtraction upon the variation) by the counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 (step S15506), The low expectation variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Note that the variation pattern table is selected in step S15506 when the variation is the variation of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 37, if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 0 or 1. If the variation pattern table H10 has a counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 of 2 or 3, the variation pattern table H11 is selected. Further, when the change is a change of the second special symbol, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 0 or 1, the change pattern table H10 indicates that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 2 Or, if it is 3, the variation pattern table H11 is selected. That is, when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is large, the time required for the special symbol variation display is less than “½” when the number of lottery processes is small. The variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  33, FIG. 35, and FIG. 37, when the opening extension function is not activated, “continuous effect 2 times (or 3 times)” is displayed, while the opening extension function is activated. Is not displayed as "continuous production ...".

  More specifically, in the variation names of the variation numbers 59 to 96, only the display of “continuous effect...” Is omitted, and actually two variations of the display effect are performed. In the simulated second variation display effect, a reach effect corresponding to the variation name is performed. As will be described later, there are prepared variation patterns corresponding to the case where the opening extension function is not activated and the case where the opening extension function is activated (for example, the variation number 49 and the variation number 79 correspond to each other). Variation pattern). That is, the variation patterns corresponding to each other when the opening extension function is not activated and when the opening extension function is activated are very similar (same or very similar) as display modes in the effect display device 115. It becomes a display mode. For example, when a variation pattern with a variation number 79 is displayed on the effect display device 115, a display mode that is very similar to the variation pattern with the variation number 49 is displayed on the effect display device 115.・ "Out of normal" is displayed.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process in step S1560 will be described. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process in step S1520, the high expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1540, or the low expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1550. A pattern is determined. Hereinafter, the variation pattern determination process will be described for each set variation pattern table.

  That is, in each variation pattern table A1 to A7, K1, K2, and H1 to H5, a total number “1000” of variation mode determination random numbers are associated with each variation number indicating a variation display mode (variation name) and the like. ing. In determining the variation pattern, one of the variation mode determination random numbers is acquired, and the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2 are acquired based on the acquired variation mode determination random numbers. One is decided.

  Therefore, when the set variation pattern table is A1, any one of the variation numbers 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23 is changed to 12/1000, It is determined with the probability of 24/1000, 20/1000, 64/1000, 188/1000, 112/1000, 156/156, 92/1000, 220/1000, and 112/1000. It will be.

  When the set fluctuation pattern table is A2, any one of the fluctuation numbers 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52 The patterns are 24/1000, 8/1000, 60/1000, 124/1000, 72/1000, 76/1000, 64/1000, 80/1000, 8/1000, respectively. It is determined with a probability of 56/1000, 120/1000, 76/1000, 76/1000, 68/1000, and 88/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is A3, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 55. When the variation pattern table set is A4, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 54 and is set. Is always determined as a variation pattern of variation number 53.

  When the set variation pattern table is A5, any one of the variation numbers 61, 62, 65, 67, 69, 72, 74, 75, 81, 84, 86, 96, and 99 is changed to 1000 respectively. 8/1000, 8/1000, 40/1000, 140/1000, 360/1000, 20/1000, 24/1000, 36/1000, 20/1000, 20/1000 It is determined with a probability of 236, 80/1000, and 8/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is A6, any one of the variation numbers 60, 64, 71, 73, 77, 80, 83, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 is selected. , 8 / 1000,100 / 1000,100 / 1000,100 / 1000,160 / 1000,140 / 1000,160 / 1000,4 / 1000,8 / 1000, respectively Are determined with a probability of 8,1000 / 4,1000 / 1000,8 / 1000,4 / 1000,192 / 1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is A7, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 98. When the set variation pattern table is K2, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 97.

  When the set variation pattern table is H1, any one of the variation numbers 4, 6, and 22 is determined with a probability of 716/1000, 240/1000, and 44/1000, respectively.

  When the set fluctuation pattern table is H2, 360/1000, 200/1000, 228/1000, and any one of the fluctuation numbers 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20 It is determined with a probability of 88/1000, 72/1000, and 52/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is H3, the variation pattern of variation number 4 is determined with a probability of 920/1000, and the variation pattern of variation number 8 is determined with a probability of 80/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is H4, any one of the variation numbers 25, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51 is changed to 1000. 360/140, 1000/1000, 84/1000, 64/1000, 32/1000, 28/1000, 16/1000, 108/1000, 60/1000, 48/1000 It is determined with a probability of 24 / minute, 24/1000, and 24/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is H5, any one of the variation numbers 58, 59, 63, 66, 68, 70, 76, 78, 79, 82, and 85 has a variation pattern of 752, 1000, respectively. 124/1000, 4/1000, 28/1000, 20/1000, 16/1000, 8/1000, 8/1000, 12/1000, 4/1000, 20/1000, It is determined with a probability of 4/1000.

  On the other hand, when the set variation pattern table is H6, the variation pattern of variation number 24 is always determined. That is, since the continuous production lottery is won, the fluctuation pattern is always determined to be out of the continuous production twice.

  Even when the set variation pattern table is H7, the variation pattern with the variation number 1 is always determined. Similarly, when the set variation pattern table is H8, it is always determined to be the variation pattern of variation number 2, and when the set variation pattern table is H9, it is always determined to be the variation pattern of variation number 3.

  When the set variation pattern table is H10, the variation pattern with the variation number 56 is always determined. When the variation pattern table set is H11, the variation pattern with the variation number 57 is always determined.

  When the variation pattern (variation number) is determined in this way, a command (information) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral board 800, and the above-mentioned in the peripheral board 800 It is used for processing such as effect lottery by the effect lottery means 960. That is, the effect mode (continuous effect, reach effect, etc.) related to the variable display effect of the decorative design 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 is actually transmitted from the main control board 710 in the peripheral board 800. Is determined according to the command to be executed. In this sense, the control related to the variable display effect of the decorative pattern 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 is performed in cooperation with the main control board 710 and the peripheral board 800 (display control means).

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if any one of the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process waits until the variation time has elapsed (NO in step S1802). When the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 is derived and displayed on the changing display of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the big hit flags is in the ON state (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the small hit flag is in the ON state (step S1806). That is, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is started as a result of the current fluctuation being stopped and the lottery result being derived. If the small hit flag is in the ON state (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If the small hit flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). As described above, since the probability variation function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, if the probability variation function is activated, the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S2001), step S2002 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the open extension function is in operation. As described above, since the opening extension function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, if the opening extension function is operating, the operation of the opening extension function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. move on. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2003 that the open extension function is not activated (NO in step S2003), step S2004 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the long open big hit. Specifically, if any one of the first long-opening jackpot flag, the second long-opening jackpot flag, and the third long-opening jackpot flag is in an ON state, it is determined that the long-opening jackpot flag is YES (YES in step S2005). ), The number of rounds in the long-opening jackpot game (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 balls) of the jackpot gaming switching device 500 per round are set (step S2006). . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008, the processing flag is updated to “5”, and the jackpot game start processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S2005, if any one of the first short opening jackpot flag and the second short opening jackpot flag is ON, it is determined that the short opening jackpot is not a long opening jackpot (NO in step S2005), Set the number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) at the time of short-opening jackpot game, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 sec) and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 3 balls) of the jackpot gaming switchgear 500 per round, and in step S2008 move on.

[About small hit game start processing]
Next, based on FIG. 40, the small hit game start processing will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. In the small hit game start process, first, the number of times of opening / closing the jackpot gaming switch 500 during the small hit game (for example, two times), the maximum opening time of the jackpot gaming switch 500 per time (for example, 0.6 sec) The maximum number of winnings (for example, 3 balls) is set. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” and the small hit game start process is terminated.

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 41, the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game opening / closing device 500 is being opened (step S2401). If jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is open (YES in step S2401), it is determined whether or not a preset maximum opening time of jackpot gaming switching device 500 has passed (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2006 or step S2007 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of the jackpot gaming switch 500 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), the jackpot gaming switch 500 is closed (step S2404), and the process proceeds to step S2405.

  If the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 has not elapsed in step S2402 (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball of the maximum winning number set in advance has been received by the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500. (Step S2403). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the count value by the opening / closing device count sensor 776 has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2006 or step S2007. If it is determined that the maximum winning number of game balls has been received by the jackpot gaming switch 500 (YES in step S2403), the process proceeds to step S2404, and the jackpot gaming switch 500 is closed. On the other hand, if the maximum winning game ball is not received in the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500, the process returns to step S2402.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether a preset number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2006 or step S2007 has been reached. If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (YES in step S2405), the process proceeds to step S2407, and the big hit flag (the first to third long open big hit flags and the first and second short open big hit flags is ON). The flag in the state) is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (NO in step S2405), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is released (step S2406), and the process returns to step S2402.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is not open (NO in step S2401), the process proceeds to step S2405.

  After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function should be activated (step S2408). If the probability variation function is to be activated, the probability variation function is activated (step S2409). Specifically, the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is one of the first long-open jackpot flag, the second long-open jackpot flag, the first short-open jackpot flag, and the second short-open jackpot flag. If there is, the probability changing function is activated. That is, if the jackpot game that has been played so far is one of the first long open big hit game, the second long open big hit game, the first short open big hit game, and the second short open big hit game, the probability changing function Actuate.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the opening extension function should be operated (step S2410). If the opening extension function should be operated, an operation process of the opening extension function is performed (step S2411). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special feature jackpot control processing is terminated. On the other hand, also when it is determined in step S2410 that the opening extension function is not to be activated (NO in step S2410), the process proceeds to step S2415 to update the processing flag to “0” and the special feature big hit control process is terminated.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the gaming state when the jackpot wins has a significant influence on whether or not the opening extension function should be activated.

  Specifically, if the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B, the jackpot flag that is turned OFF in step S2407 is released to the first long Only when it is the big hit flag or the first short open big hit flag, it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is the second long open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag, it is determined in step S2408 that the probability changing function should be activated, but in step S2410. It is determined that the open extension function is not activated.

  If the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot in the external advantageous game state A or the external advantageous game state B, the type of jackpot flag that is turned OFF in step S2407 is any type of jackpot flag. Even so, it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. That is, whether the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is any one of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit (winning the third long open big hit In such a case, it is impossible to proceed to step S2410), and it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. Therefore, once the first long open big hit game or the first short open big hit game is executed, the second long open big hit game or the second short open big hit game is executed unless the third long open big hit game is executed. The later gaming state becomes the external advantageous gaming state B.

  Strictly speaking, in the process of step S2410, first, based on the jackpot flag, it is determined whether or not one of the first long open jackpot and the first short open jackpot is won. As a result, if it is determined that either the first long open jackpot or the first short open jackpot has been won, the open extension function is activated in the process of step S2411.

  However, in the process of step S2410, neither the first long open jackpot or the first short open jackpot is won, but either the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is won. In some cases, it may be determined that it is. In such a case, whether or not the above-mentioned extension extension function has been activated at the time of winning the corresponding hit (second long open big hit or second short open big hit) (before the big hit game is played) Make further decisions. As a result, when it is determined that the opening extension function has not been activated (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), the process proceeds to step S2411 (opening extension function is activated). When the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), the special feature jackpot control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening extension function has been activated (external advantageous gaming state A or external advantageous gaming state B), the processing flag is set to “ When it is updated to “0” (step S2415), the special bonus jackpot control process is terminated.

  In such a configuration, as long as the player is in the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is merely an opportunity to shift to the external normal gaming state. It ’s just a hit. However, after either of the first long opening jackpot and the first short opening jackpot has been elected and the game has shifted to a gaming state (external advantageous gaming state) in which the opening extension function is activated, the second long opening jackpot, The second short opening jackpot is a "winning opportunity to shift to the external advantageous gaming state (the winning that is most advantageous for the player)", and the gaming value is greatly changed. In this sense, the first long opening jackpot or the first short opening jackpot is “the opportunity to shift to a gaming state in which the gaming values of the second long opening jackpot and the second short opening jackpot are different. It can be said.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, even when it is determined in step S2408 that the probability variation function should not be activated (third long open jackpot) (NO in step S2408), the corresponding hit ( It is determined whether or not the opening extension function has been activated at the time of winning the third long open jackpot (before the jackpot game is played) (step S2412). As a result, when it is determined that the release extension function has not been activated (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), the processing flag is updated to “0” at that time (step S2415). ). However, if it is determined in step S2412 that the release extension function has been activated (external advantageous game state A or external advantageous game state B), the release extension function is activated (step S2413). Thereafter, when the number of times of opening extension function operation (for example, 100 times) is set (step S2414), the process proceeds to step S2415 to update the processing flag to “0”, and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. .

  In such a configuration, even if the third long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous state, after the jackpot game corresponding to the selection is performed, the above-mentioned second The two long open jackpots and the second short open jackpot are set to function as “hits that trigger the transition to the external advantageous game state (the highest wins for the player)”.

  If the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot while in the external normal game state, the jackpot flag that was turned off in step S2407 is open and extended in step S2412 regardless of the jackpot flag. It is not determined that the function should be activated (ie, proceeding to step S2415 following step S2412). This is because the process cannot proceed to step S2412 unless the third long open jackpot is won.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external advantageous game state, when the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is the third long open jackpot flag, in step S2412 It is determined that the open extension function should be activated, and the process proceeds to step S2413. If the jackpot flag turned off in step S2407 is not the third long open jackpot flag, the process does not proceed to step S2412 and always proceeds to step S2409. Therefore, it cannot be determined NO in step S2412.

[Special electric accessory small hit control processing]
Next, the special electric accessory small hit control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. In the special electric accessory small hit control process, it is first determined whether or not the maximum winning game ball set in step S2201 has won the big hit game opening / closing device 500 (step S2501). If the maximum number of winning game balls has won the jackpot gaming switch 500 (YES in step S2501), it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming switch 500 is being opened or closed (step S2502). If the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is being opened / closed (YES in step S2502), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is closed (step S2503), and the small hitting flag is turned off (step S2509). If the big hit game opening / closing device 500 is not open (ie, closed) in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2509, and the small hit flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S2510, the process flag is updated to “0”, and the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that the maximum winning game ball has not won the jackpot gaming switch 500, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming switch 500 is open (step S2504). Here, if the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is being opened (YES in step S2504), it is determined whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed in step S2201 (step S2505), and the opening time has elapsed. If so (YES in step S2505), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is closed (step S2506). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of times of opening / closing the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 has reached the number set in advance in step S2201 (step S2507). (YES) After turning off the small hit flag (step S2509), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2510). If it is determined in step S2504 that the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is not open (NO in step S2504), the process proceeds to step S2507.

  If it is determined in step S2505 that the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 has not passed the predetermined time (NO in step S2505), the process returns to step S2501. If it is determined in step S2507 that the number of opening of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 has not reached the predetermined number (NO in step S2507), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is opened again (step S2508), and thereafter Return to step S2501).

  As described above, when it is determined that the pre-set game ball has won the jackpot gaming switch 500 (YES in step S2501), whether the jackpot gaming switch 500 preset in step S2201 has been reached. Regardless of whether or not, the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated.

[About game content]
Next, game contents in each game state will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state A, the external normal gaming state B, the external advantageous gaming state A, and the external advantageous gaming state B are set as described above. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, externally, when the player is in one of the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B, it is determined in advance regardless of the state. The player is only suggested to the player to be in the single (one) gaming state (external normal gaming state which is also the gaming state at the time of initial).

  When a game ball wins one of the start ports 600, 602, 604, a special symbol lottery is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. The lottery result is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and is displayed on the effect display device 115 by a combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1153.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the effect display device 115 displays a decorative symbol 1153 in the central area, a first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, a second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002, and a hold display. And a region 1150. The decorative symbol 1153 is composed of three symbol columns, the left symbol column 1153a displayed on the left side when viewed from the player, the middle symbol column 1153b displayed in the middle when viewed from the player, and the right symbol column when viewed from the player. The right symbol row 1153c to be displayed is composed of three symbol rows. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbols 1 to 8 are sequentially arranged and displayed in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153. Of these symbols, 3 and 7 are displayed in red, 1, 2, 5 and 6 are displayed in pink, and 4 and 8 are displayed in blue. Hereinafter, a symbol displayed in red is referred to as a specific symbol, a symbol displayed in pink is referred to as a quasi-specific symbol, and a symbol displayed in blue is referred to as a non-specific symbol.

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in a lower area of the effect display device 115 and has a first hold display area 1151 and a second hold display area 1152 adjacent to each other. The first hold display area 1151 has four hold storage display sections, a first hold storage display section 1151a to a fourth hold storage display section 1151d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The second hold display area 1152 has four hold storage display sections, a fifth hold storage display section 1152a to an eighth hold storage display section 1152d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. That is, the sum of the hold storage display part of the first hold display area 1151 and the hold storage display part of the second hold display area 1152, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) of the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903, and the first The sum of the upper limit value (second predetermined number) of holding by the 2 special symbol holding counter 913 is the same number. More specifically, the number of the reserved storage display parts in the first hold display area 1151 is equal to the first predetermined number, and the number of the hold display parts in the second hold display area 1152 is equal to the second predetermined number. The number is the same. In the present embodiment, both the number of reserved storage display parts (first predetermined number) in the first reserved display area 1151 and the number of reserved storage display parts (first predetermined number) in the second reserved display area 1152 are both reserved. The number is “4” before digestion (“3” after retention digestion).

  In addition, the first reserved storage display unit 1151a, the second reserved storage display unit 1151b, the third reserved storage display unit 1151c, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a, the sixth The on-hold storage display unit 1152b, the seventh on-hold storage display unit 1152c, and the eighth on-hold storage display unit 1152d are regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction, and the derivation to the common symbol display area 115c is as described above. Derived in the order listed. That is, the lottery hold corresponding to each hold storage display unit from the first hold (hold corresponding to the first hold storage display unit 1151a) to the end hold (for example, the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d) in order. It will be derived in the order of the hold. Thereby, the order derived | led-out to the common symbol display area 115c can be grasped | ascertained clearly.

  Each hold storage display unit 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, which is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, and held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. Is displayed in any one of the second display mode indicating that it is held and the third display mode indicating that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903.

  Each of the on-hold storage display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second on-hold display area 1152 can be displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode. Information regarding the number of holds in the special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 may be hidden.

  For example, in FIG. 44, the display modes of the first hold storage display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are the third display modes. The display mode of the third hold storage display unit 1151c and the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is the second display mode, and the display mode of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is the first display mode. Note that the display modes of the seventh reserved storage display unit 1152c and the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d are not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first display mode indicates that a frame (inside the frame is gray) is displayed and can be reserved by the first special symbol reservation counter 903. The second display mode means that a red character (here, a character imitating UFO) is displayed and held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. The third display mode means that a blue character (here, a character simulating a UFO of a size smaller than the second display mode) is displayed and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Yes. In this way, the display mode is different between the display mode that means being held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the display mode that is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. .

  Here, FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), where (a) is a background image of a dome stadium, (B) is an image in which the background image is a passenger ship, and (c) is an image in which the background image is a night view. In the external normal game state, any one of the images shown in FIGS. 43A to 43C is selected and determined at random. Note that the operation button 327 may be used to select and determine any one of the images in FIGS. Thereby, a player's desired image will be displayed on the production | presentation display apparatus 115, and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  In an external normal gaming state, the first long open big hit and the second long open big hit in a lottery process (hereinafter simply referred to as “special symbol lottery process”) by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 Or, when winning the 3rd long open jackpot, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153 scrolls in the vertical direction, and then stops and displays with a zebra eye (three symbol rows 1153a to 1153c become the same symbol). Is done.

  The result of the special symbol lottery process is displayed not only on the decorative symbol 1153 but also on the lower right of the image displayed on the effect display device 115 as the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Here, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is displayed as the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is displayed as the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002.

  When the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open jackpot, the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is stopped and displayed with a specific symbol, a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and then A long open jackpot game based on the 1 long open jackpot is executed. The gaming state after the long open jackpot game is over will be in the external advantageous gaming state B until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process. Although the details will be described later, after the long open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process in the external normal game state based on the first long open jackpot has ended, there is a possibility that a great benefit may be brought to the player Enter the “promotion mode”.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second long open jackpot or the third long open big hit, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are stopped and displayed with a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol double-eyed After that, a long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot is executed.

  The game state after the long open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process being the second long open jackpot is the external normal game state B. The gaming state after the long opening jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery processing being the third long opening jackpot is the external normal gaming state A. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second long open jackpot and the result of the special symbol lottery process is the third long open jackpot, these The external game state after the long open jackpot game based on the jackpot of the game is the normal external game state that also appears at the time of the initial as shown in FIG. Therefore, the player determines that the game state is not advantageous to him and plays the game.

  In this way, if the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state is a doublet with a specific symbol, the first long open jackpot is won at that time. Can be grasped. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the gaming state after the first long open big hit game is the external advantageous gaming state B (that is, to enter the promotion mode), it can give the player a great expectation, Reduction can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state is a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, it is grasped which jackpot is won at this stage. I can't do it. However, even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are quasi-specific symbols or non-specific symbols, if the first long open jackpot is won, After the jackpot game ends, it is informed that the first long open jackpot was made. Therefore, the player executes the jackpot game while having a sense of expectation that the player will enter the “promotion mode”, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the jackpot game that tends to be monotonous.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short-open big hit, the second short-open big hit or the small win regardless of the gaming state, in this embodiment, the opportunity display is not displayed on the effect display device 115. Eyes are displayed. If the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot, a short open big hit game based on the first short open big hit is executed, and the gaming state after the short open big hit game is finished is the external advantageous gaming state B. (It can be grasped that the first short opening big hit was obtained by operating the opening extension function). After the short open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot, the player enters the “promotion mode”.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second short open big hit, the short open big hit game based on the second short open big hit is executed, and the game state after the short open big hit game is finished is external normal Game state B is entered. If the result of the special symbol lottery process is a small hit, a small hit game is executed. In addition, since the operation of the condition device is not a condition for the execution of the small hit game, the game state is not changed even if the small hit game is executed. For example, if the player wins a small hit when in the external normal gaming state A, the player remains in the external normal gaming state A after the end of the small hit game, and wins a small bonus when in the external normal gaming state B. In this case, the external normal game state B remains even after the end of the small hit game.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second short open big hit or the small win when in the external normal game state, the short open big hit game based on the second short open big hit or the small hit game based on the small hit After the game ends, the game state becomes an external normal game state, and the operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is not controlled in the promotion mode. For this reason, it seems that there is no change in the gaming state from the viewpoint of the player.

  It should be noted that the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per first short open jackpot, Based on the number of second short-open jackpots, the “probability of entering the promotion mode” in the external normal gaming state is approximately one third. The “probability of entering the“ promotion mode ”when in the external normal gaming state” is the “percentage distribution rate per chance that triggers the transition to the promotion mode” when in the external normal gaming state. Yes, specifically, the probability of entering the `` promotion mode '' after winning the jackpot game in the special symbol lottery processing in the external normal game state and finishing the jackpot game based on the winning to the jackpot game, This means that it is approximately one third of the number of times that the jackpot game is executed.

  After winning the 2nd long open jackpot or the 3rd long open jackpot in the external normal game state, after the long open jackpot game based on the winning of the 2nd long open jackpot or the 3rd long open jackpot ends, It becomes an external normal game state. However, if the winning type at this time is the second long open jackpot, the gaming state after the second long open big hit game is the external normal gaming state B, and if the third long open big hit, the third long The gaming state after the open jackpot game ends is the external normal gaming state A.

  Thus, when the winning in the external normal game state to either the second length open jackpots and second arcuate opening jackpot, even though they may be any of the winning type, jackpot gaming according to the per applicable is completed After that, the external normal gaming state is entered again, and the effect image indicating that it is in the external normal gaming state is displayed on the effect display device 115 again. Further, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a state indicator lamp which always displayed gaming state (e.g., when the lottery process is executed, a lamp for displaying whether probability variation function is operating) also not provided . Accordingly, the player, be either internally of externally normal game state A and the external normal game state B, play a game it is determined that the game state is not advantageous for self (gaming state appearing even at initial) It will be. In other words, the player, since the operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 are operated is the same as that at the time of the initial, no change in the game state from the time of the initial, even winning probability of the jackpot above It is determined that it will be the same as the winning probability A (first probability) adopted at the time of initial, and the game is played.

  However, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot (per-share distribution ratio per second long open jackpot) and the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot (per hit distribution per third long open jackpot) with respect to the random number width of the design random numbers described above Rate), in the external normal gaming state, the probability of winning the second long open jackpot (the distribution ratio per second long open jackpot) and the probability of winning the third long open jackpot (third long open jackpot) Is the same level (generally 2 to 3). According to such a configuration, when the game is continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state by winning either the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, the winning probability A employed also at the initial time is used. When the lottery process is performed with (first probability), and when the lottery process is performed with a winning probability B (second probability) that is higher than the corresponding selection probability A, the game state is the same. Under the circumstances suggested to the player, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the double standard of the winning probability A and the winning probability B. Accordingly, the player wins the jackpot in a small number of lotteries since the last jackpot game was performed, despite the fact that the player has continuously shifted to the same external normal gaming state as at the initial time. It becomes easy to enjoy the so-called jackpot villas per surprise (unexpected jackpot).

  Incidentally, FIG. 44 is an image showing an aspect of the effect mode that appears on the effect display device 115 when in the external normal gaming state. For example, one of the second long open jackpot and the third long open jackpot is won. Therefore, it appears on the effect display device 115 when, for example, the game continuously shifts to the external normal gaming state. In this image, the background image is a dome stadium, and the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) scroll in the vertical direction. Thus, as long as the player is in the external normal gaming state, the player is in a predetermined single (one) gaming state (external normal gaming state that is also adopted at the time of initial) regardless of the internal gaming state. Is intimately suggested to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the image shown in FIG. 44 is displayed until the special symbol lottery process is performed up to 50 times after the long open jackpot game based on the winning of the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot is completed. Is done. And if a big hit game does not generate | occur | produce during the result of a special symbol lottery process being performed 50 times, after the image shown in FIG. 44 is displayed, any image in FIG. 43 (a)-(c) will be displayed. Is displayed.

  By the way, based on the number of random numbers of the second long open jackpot with respect to the random number width of the design random numbers and the number of third long open jackpots with respect to the random number width of the design random numbers, the jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot and the third long The ratio with the open jackpot game is approximately 2 to 3 (that is, when the game state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long jackpot or the third long jackpot is finished is the external normal gaming state A) And the external normal gaming state B is approximately 3 to 2). Therefore, in the gaming state after the long-opening jackpot game based on the second long-opening jackpot or the third long-opening jackpot, the frequency of winning the jackpot increases until the special symbol change is performed several tens of times. In other words, the jackpot game can be executed in a so-called bead sequence. In the case of the external normal gaming state B, it goes without saying that the big win is won at a very high frequency until the change of the special symbol is performed several tens of times, but even if it is the external normal gaming state A, Due to the probability of winning a jackpot in the external normal gaming state A in this embodiment, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot before the special symbol changes until several tens of turns.

  On the other hand, since the player is playing on the premise that the player is in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability variation function does not operate, the number of times after the long open big hit game based on the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit game has ended It is unexpected for a player to win a jackpot in a daisy chain at an early stage compared to the winning probability of the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A where the probability variation function does not operate, such as 10 rotations. In this way, if the player wins a jackpot unexpectedly (hereinafter referred to as an “unexpected jackpot”), the player thinks that he / she has a “luck” and plays the game well. It can be performed, and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

  Such an unexpected jackpot is actually a game state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended, even though the game state does not seem to be a game state in which the probability variation function operates. Is generated by actively presenting the case of the external normal game state B in which the probability changing function is activated (as much as the external normal game state B). Therefore, the jackpot game is not executed in a daisy chain by mere coincidence relying only on the winning probability of the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability variation function does not operate. Since it can be won, the decline of interest can be suppressed. Moreover, despite the possibility of an unexpected jackpot after the long-open jackpot game based on the second long-open jackpot or the third long-open jackpot game, the reverse, that is, what is the number of changes in the special symbol, for example? Since it is not intentionally set to a game state that falls into a so-called humiliation such as a thousand revolutions (but there is a possibility that it will accidentally fall into the so-called hamari), the willingness to continue the game is not lost, Reduction can be suppressed.

In other words, in the external normal gaming state after the long-opening jackpot game based on the second long-opening jackpot or the third long-opening jackpot, the winning probability A adopted at the initial time and the probability higher than the corresponding selection probability A The lottery process for the jackpot is executed with one of the two winning probabilities B and the winning probabilities B equal to each other (by the double standard of the winning probabilities A and B). Therefore, even if this external normal gaming state is repeated, since at least the same winning probability A as the external normal gaming state A is maintained, the situation of falling into a state where the jackpot is not won for a long period of time is eliminated. In addition, with the winning probability B that is easy to win a big win, it is possible to give a change (so-called wave) to the ease of winning a big win in the external normal gaming state.
The state can be changed (so-called wave) in the ease of winning the jackpot.

  In addition, if the winning probabilities for the second long open jackpot and the third long open jackpot that trigger the transition to the external normal gaming state are similar, the winning probability in the external normal gaming state is as follows. With B, the expectation that the jackpot lottery process will be executed increases. In other words, the winning probability (average probability) expected in the external normal gaming state is much larger than the winning probability A in consideration of the proportion of the winning probability A adopted in the external normal gaming state and the proportion of the winning probability B adopted. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation is further enhanced in the external normal gaming state.

[About time limit mode]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the second short open big hit or the small win is won in the external normal game state, the short open big hit game based on the second short open big hit or the small hit game based on the small win win ends. After that, enter the “time limit mode”.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the time limit mode. In this “time limit mode”, as shown in FIG. 45, eight letters of the alphabet are displayed on the effect display device 115. When the time limit mode is entered, all alphabets are displayed in black and partially colored according to the progress of the game. In FIG. 45, “I”, “K”, “A”, and “D” are black display, and “P”, “N”, “L”, and “Y” are colored display. In the time limit mode, as the game progresses, the black display of the alphabet is changed to colored display, and when the alphabet of all 8 characters changes to colored display within a limited time shown in advance, The jackpot game is started. In this time limit mode, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) scroll in the vertical direction as shown in FIG.

  When the player enters the “time limit mode” by winning the second short open big hit or small hit in the external normal gaming state A in which neither the probability changing function nor the open extension function is operated, the gaming state in this time limit mode is There are cases where the game state is A and external normal game state B. Based on the number of jackpot random numbers with respect to the random number width of the above-mentioned determination random number, the second short open big hit with respect to the random number width of the design random number, and the number of random numbers with respect to the random number width of the determination random number, the normal normal gaming state The ratio between the winning probability for the second short open jackpot and the winning probability for the jackpot in A is 1:19.

  On the other hand, when the player enters the “time limit mode” by winning the second short open big hit or small win in the external normal gaming state B, the gaming state at this time is always the external normal gaming state B. This is because, since the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, the external normal gaming state B continues even if the small hit is won in the external normal gaming state B.

  By the way, although the game state in the “time limit mode” may be in the case of the external normal game state A and the case of the external normal game state B, the game state can be recognized only by the player only in the external normal game state. It is. However, in the external normal game state A, after winning the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, the long open big hit game based on the winning of the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended. Instead of making the player think that it is a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate as in the gaming state, as described above, a predetermined matter (in this embodiment, 8 characters) within a certain limited time. A certain amount of expectation is given to the player such that the jackpot game is started when the black display portion for all alphabets is colored and displayed). In addition, since the winning probability for the jackpot is higher than the winning probability for the jackpot, the player enters the “time limit mode” at a relatively high frequency, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Externally, the jackpot game starts when the black display portion for all eight alphabets is colored and displayed, but internally, when the jackpot is won, all the eight alphabets are colored. Processing such as display is performed. Therefore, when the player is in the normal normal game state B, the colored display alphabet is greater than the black display alphabet in the external normal game state A, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. ing.

  In the present embodiment, when entering the “time limit mode”, the timer 1004 indicating the remaining time of the “time limit mode” is displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 115. Here, the time in the “time limit mode” is a fixed time (3 minutes in the present embodiment) regardless of whether the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B. Since the number of fluctuations of special symbols per minute is about 5 on average, the number of fluctuations of special symbols in “Time Limit Mode” is about 15. If done, the number of fluctuations will be further reduced). This number of 15 times is less than half of the reciprocal of the winning probability for the jackpot in the external normal gaming state B.

  Thus, in the “time limit mode”, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the winning probability B that is higher than the jackpot winning probability A adopted at the initial time by the winning of the second short open jackpot. The lottery process is performed under the condition that the external normal gaming state at the time of the corresponding selection is maintained by the winning of the small win. In other words, since there is a case in which a lottery process is performed with the winning probability B by winning the second short open jackpot, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in the “time limit mode” is suitably set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the “time limit mode”.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the game is continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state, the winning probability A adopted at the initial time and the winning probability set to be higher than the corresponding winning probability A. One of the two winning probabilities with B is adopted to the same extent (winning probability A and winning probability B are double standard), and when the lottery process is performed with the winning probability A, the lottery process is performed with the winning probability B. Under the circumstances where the player is suggested to be in a predetermined single (one) game state regardless of the time, the lottery process is performed with either the winning probability A or the winning probability B. Like to do. Therefore, even if the player enters the “time limit mode” with the winning of the second short-opening jackpot or the winning of the jackpot, the player will be able to perform the lottery process only with the winning probability A. Compared with the case where it is confirmed by looking, it is possible to dramatically increase the degree of jackpot expectation.

  By the way, when the game state in the “time limit mode” is the external normal game state B, the game state remains in the external normal game state B even if the jackpot is not won during the “time limit mode”. That is, in the “time limit mode”, even if the “time limit mode” ends without the black display portion of all eight alphabets being colored, the probability variation function remains active. The jackpot game can occur at a relatively early stage.

  In the present embodiment, even if the gaming state in the “time limit mode” is the external normal gaming state B, it is not always a big win in the “time limit mode”. In other words, while the number of changes in the special symbol in the “time limit mode” is about 15 as described above, the reciprocal of the jackpot winning probability in the external normal gaming state B is more than 15 times. That is, even if it is assumed that the “time limit mode” is the external normal gaming state B, the probability of winning a big hit in the “time limit mode” is less than half. As a result, although the player is discouraged once, it can be revived and it can be thought that the player has won the jackpot, the player can be given more joy, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Moreover, when the “time limit mode” ends, even if the game is in the external normal game state B, the background image of the effect display device 115 is externally similar to that in the external normal game state A. Therefore, when the “time limit mode” ends, the player can be greatly discouraged. The greater the degree of discouragement, the greater the joy when a big hit game is generated at a relatively early stage.

  In addition, since the “time limit mode” is entered not only by a small hit but also by winning the second short opening big hit, unlike the so-called mission mode, which is merely a mere presentation, It is possible to improve the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot in the “time limit mode”. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if a small win is won in the external normal gaming state (that is, the external normal gaming state B) after winning the second long open jackpot, the “time limit mode” is entered. In this case, in the “time limit mode”, since the probability changing function is operated based on the second long open jackpot, it is very easy to win the jackpot. As a result, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot in the “time limit mode” can be further improved.

  In the “Time Limit Mode”, as in the previous case, the big win lottery with one of the two winning probabilities (double standard) of the winning probability A in which the probability changing function is not activated and the winning probability B in which the probability changing function is activated. Processing is executed. Then, in order to increase the expectation that the jackpot lottery process is executed with the winning probability B in the “time limit mode”, when the second short open jackpot is won, the “time limit mode” is entered. However, such as the second short-opening jackpot, “the hit where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” is recognized by the player as having a low value as a jackpot There is a need to improve this.

  In this regard, as will be described later, in this embodiment, when the first short-opening jackpot is won, which is “a winning where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” Shifts to the promotion mode in which the second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probabilistic jackpot (a so-called probability fluctuation function and a so-called short-time function, which is the most valuable hit for the player) I am doing so. In such a promotion mode, so-called probable jackpots are more likely to be won than in the above-described external normal gaming state (in this sense, if the winning probabilities are only “so-called probable jackpots”, the corresponding selection probability is more It can be said that the mode has been changed to a high winning probability), and the player's main purpose is to shift to such a promotion mode, rather than simply winning per winning ball that prompts a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. The game will be aimed at winning the first short open big hit. As a result, the value of “a win where a player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning a jackpot” is included, including the case where the second short open jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the player does not win a winning ball that prompts a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. That is, it is possible to provide not only a monotonous game such as how many winnings can be won per player who is required to pay out a certain amount of game balls, but also a new game.

  By the way, in the “time limit mode”, in the external normal game state A, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit is won, and the long open based on the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit is won. There is a case where the player enters a normal game state after the jackpot game is over. At this time, the sum of the number of changes in the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game until entering the “time limit mode” and the number of changes in the special symbol in the “time limit mode” may be less than 50 times. is there. For example, if a special symbol change display is made 10 times before entering the “time limit mode” after the jackpot game ends, the “time limit mode” The sum of the number of times the special symbol fluctuates until it enters the time and the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the “time limit mode” is approximately 25 times. In such a case, when the “time limit mode” ends, the image displayed on the effect display device 115 regardless of whether the game is in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B is shown in FIG. The image is any one of (a) to (c) and does not return to FIG. 44 again. As a result, in the external normal game state A, the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot was won, and the long open jackpot game based on the win for the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended. When entering the “time limit mode” from this gaming state, in the external normal gaming state A, the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won, and the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won. A process for storing the number of special symbol fluctuations in the gaming state after the long open jackpot game based on the winning is not required, and the load on the CPU 832 mounted on the display device control board 816 can be reduced.

[About promotion mode]
Next, game contents in the external advantageous game state B, that is, the “promotion mode” will be described. Winning the jackpot without the operation of the extension extension function (that is, the jackpot where the extension extension function does not operate after the jackpot game ends even if winning in the special symbol lottery process in the external normal gaming state A) Even so, in the “promotion mode”, the opening extension function is activated after the jackpot game ends.

  In addition, as described above, the “promotion mode” means that when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open big hit or the first short open big hit in the external normal gaming state, the first long open big hit This is a gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game based on the first short-opening jackpot or the short-opening jackpot game based on the first short-opening jackpot (that is, the external advantageous gaming state B). In the promotion mode entered after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot and the promotion mode entered after the short open jackpot game based on the first short open jackpot ended, the effect display device 115 The background image displayed on is different.

  Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 when the promotion mode is entered after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot has ended. According to FIG. 46, in the promotion mode after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot is over, the effect display device 115 displays a diagram reminiscent of outer space as a background image. In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) is displayed by being attached to a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and the front and back surfaces are alternately displayed instead of scroll fluctuation. As a result, rotational fluctuations that change the design are performed.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device when the short open big hit game based on the first short open big hit is finished and then the promotion mode is entered. According to FIG. 47, in the promotion mode after the short open jackpot game based on the first short open jackpot is over, the effect display device 115 displays the character silhouette on the dark background image (the character silhouette is a decorative pattern). It is difficult to see in FIG. 46 because it is displayed behind 1153). In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) is displayed on a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and scrolls.

  Thus, the image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the “promotion mode” is significantly different from the image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state. In particular, since the display method of each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is remarkably different, the “elevation mode” is in a special state different from the external normal game state. Can be grasped. Furthermore, since the operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is controlled in the promotion mode, the player can grasp that the gaming state is advantageous to him / herself.

  By the way, when it is in the external normal game state, if the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process, the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is based. The gaming state after the short opening big hit game is ended becomes an external normal gaming state B that does not involve the operation of the opening extension function. In addition, when the third long open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process in the external normal game state A, the game state after the long open big hit game ends is the external normal game state A.

  However, in the “promotion mode”, even if the second long open jackpot or the second short open big hit is won in the special symbol lottery process, the long open big hit game or the second short open based on the second long open big hit The gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game based on the jackpot ends is an external advantageous gaming state B that involves the operation of both the probability changing function and the opening extension function. That is, even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153 a to 1153 c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are not only specific symbols but also semi-specific symbols, the “promotion mode” after the jackpot game ends. (In other words, it becomes a probable open extended game). Here, among the symbols 1 to 8, the number of specific symbols is two (3 and 7) and the number of quasi-specific symbols is four (1, 2, 5 and 6). It seems that “promotion mode” continues with a probability of 6 minutes. Thereby, game willingness improves and the fall of interest can be suppressed. However, even if the result of the special symbol lottery processing is the first long open big hit or the second long open big hit, as in the case of the external normal gaming state A, the effect display device 115 stops at a non-specific symbol double eye. It may be displayed.

  In the “elevation mode”, internally, the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, and the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot for the random number width of the above described design random number Based on the number of random numbers per first short-open big jackpot and the number of random numbers per second short-open big jackpot, the probability that the “promotion mode” will continue after the jackpot game ends is approximately three-fifths. In this sense, the second long open jackpot has a function (in this way) in the external normal game state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the external normal game state becomes the highest per-share distribution rate. While maintaining the specifications as a gaming machine), in the external advantageous gaming state, the function is set so that the per-share distribution ratio that triggers the transition to the external advantageous gaming state becomes the highest per-share distribution ratio. It can also be said that the reinforcement is to increase the continuity of the chance gaming state advantageous to the player.

  By the way, also in this “promotion mode”, when the third long open jackpot is won, after the jackpot game corresponding to the third long open jackpot winning is over, the external normal gaming state A is entered. Will be migrated. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, prior to the transition to the external normal gaming state A, the second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probability variation jackpot (awakening gaming state), and a so-called probability variation function and a so-called time reduction. The function is shifted to the “retraction mode” in which only the short-time function is activated among the functions for a predetermined retraction period. In other words, in this case, even if the third long open jackpot is won in the “promotion mode”, the predetermined pullback period after the jackpot game corresponding to the selection is performed is a so-called probability variable jackpot (so-called probability fluctuation jackpot). If it is only the winning probability of the function and the so-called short-time function, the winning value is the highest value for the player) The lottery process for the jackpot is performed. Therefore, when the “promotion mode” ends, it is suitably suppressed that the interest of the game is suddenly lowered. In addition, the “retraction mode” of this embodiment is configured as an external advantageous game state A with the operation of the opening extension function (the probability changing function is not activated). In this “retraction mode”, the number of symbols constituting each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153 is eight, whereas the specific symbol (3, 7) and the quasi-specific symbol (1, 2) Since the number of 5 and 6) is 6, the visual probability that the “promotion mode” will continue is 3/4. Thereby, it can have a big expectation with respect to continuing "elevation mode", and can suppress the fall of interest.

  In this way, while in the external normal gaming state, the expectation to enter the “elevation mode” is relatively low, but once entering the “elevation mode”, the so-called continuous change in the expectation increases and the interest is great. Enhanced. Moreover, in terms of probability, if you win three times in the jackpot in the special symbol lottery in the external normal gaming state A, one of them will be a jackpot to enter the “promotion mode” (however, in the visual one quarter), The conditions for entering the “promotion mode” are not so severe for the player. In other words, if the conditions for entering the “elevation mode” are severe, the “elevation mode” is far away unless the player is a high-skilled so-called advanced player. Some players feel that way. However, if it is possible to enter “elevation mode” with a probability of 1 out of 3 times, anyone will feel that there is an opportunity to enter “elevation mode”, and “elevation mode” will be familiar Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, in the conventional short opening with probability variation (so-called sudden probability variation), the prize ball is not paid out and only the function of the probability variation function is provided, but rather, the player can obtain a lot of prize balls. I sometimes felt disappointed that I failed to win. In that regard, in the first short opening jackpot of the present embodiment, after the short opening jackpot game based on the first short opening jackpot is completed, the mode shifts to the “promotion mode”. In the “promotion mode”, not only the operation of the probability changing function is given, but also when the second long opening jackpot is won, the external advantageous gaming state B is executed after the jackpot game ends (that is, the second long opening) The jackpot is given the same benefits as the first long open jackpot). In other words, the first short opening jackpot of this embodiment functions as a “perception awakening” that transforms the second long opening jackpot into a first long opening jackpot that has a greater benefit to the player. Therefore, the player can expect a large profit when winning the first short opening jackpot, and does not feel the disappointment as when winning per conventional short opening with probability change.

[Retraction mode]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the “promotion mode” is finished, the “promotion mode” can be pulled back with a high probability until the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a specified value. Mode "exists. The specified value is the number of times the opening extension function is activated (for example, 100 times).

  Specifically, in the case of the external advantageous gaming state A, in the special symbol lottery process, if one of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit is won, The “elevation mode” can be pulled back again. That is, in this embodiment, the state in which the opening extension function is activated is a state (awakening gaming state) in which the gaming value as the second long opening jackpot is different. Then, based on the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per first short open jackpot, and the number of second short open jackpots relative to the random number width of the design random number described above. In this “Pullback Mode”, if you win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery process, the probability that you can pull back the “Promotion Mode” is about three times if the jackpot game is executed five times. It is. That is, the lottery process for the jackpot so as to be more advantageous to the player than when in the external normal gaming state (in this embodiment, a series of processes including the process of determining the winning type according to the design random number) Will be done.

  In this embodiment, when the third long open jackpot is won as a result of the lottery process for the jackpot during the “retraction mode”, a special symbol is played after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed. Until the number of fluctuations reaches a specified value, the “elevation mode” is again shifted (extended) to the “retraction mode” that can be pulled back with a high probability. Also at this time, the specified value is, for example, 100 times.

  Here, FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device in the “retraction mode”. In this “retraction mode”, the stage space is displayed as a background image on the effect display device 115 as shown in FIG. In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is displayed on a card-like display on which a character is drawn, as in the promotion mode. As a result, even in this pull-back mode, it is possible to grasp at a glance that there is a special state unlike the external normal gaming state. Note that the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is scrolled differently from the promotion mode.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is externally played as a single external normal game state both in the external normal game state A and in the external normal game state B. It is grasped by the person. In other words, if the jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state A, it is certain that the probability changing function will be activated after the jackpot game is over. Only when winning short open jackpot. Therefore, in the external normal gaming state, it seems that the probability of winning the jackpot with the activation of the probability variation function is relatively low, but once entering the “elevation mode”, the probability of winning the jackpot with the operation of the probability variation function is increased. I can feel it. Therefore, in the external normal gaming state, the game is played with expectation for the “promotion mode” that can give a large profit to the player, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, when winning the first short open jackpot or the second short open jackpot, the game balls given as prize balls to the player while winning the big jackpot in the special symbol lottery process The amount is extremely small as compared to the case where the first long opening jackpot, the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won. Accordingly, when winning the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot, the probability changing function is activated after the short opening jackpot game based on the winning of the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot ends. Even if you are convinced, the player will feel lost.

  However, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the first short open jackpot can be convinced that the first short open jackpot can be convinced in the special symbol lottery process (that is, it can be convinced that it is not a small hit), The two long open jackpot functions as a so-called probabilistic jackpot (wakeful gaming state), and enters a “promotion mode” in which both the so-called probabilistic function and the so-called time-shortening function operate. Therefore, even if the player wins the jackpot type (first short-open jackpot) with a small amount of game balls given to the player as a prize ball, a large number of game balls are subsequently awarded to the player as a prize ball. Since it can be granted, rather than the feeling that winning the first short open jackpot is a loss, the expectation that the jackpot game continues to change will exceed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in the “elevation mode”, the “elevation mode” continues even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153 a to 1153 c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are not only specific symbols but also quasi-specific symbols. It seems that “promotion mode” continues with a probability of three quarters. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the feeling that it is a loss to win the first short open jackpot, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the result of the special symbol lottery processing in the “promotion mode” after the first short open jackpot game ends is the third long open jackpot game, the long open jackpot game based on the third long open jackpot game ends. After that, it enters the “retraction mode”. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short-open big hit game, the probability that the game ball as the award ball is returned to the external normal game state A is hardly given to the player. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the feeling that winning the 1st short open jackpot is a loss, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot game will continue, suppressing the decrease in interest it can.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins any of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit in the “elevation mode”, After the jackpot game based on is completed, the gaming state becomes the “promotion mode” again (that is, both the probability changing function and the opening extension function are activated). Further, in the “pulling back mode”, if the winning combination of the first long opening jackpot, the second long opening jackpot, the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot is won, the “promotion mode” can be pulled back again. This is to confirm whether or not the opening extension function is activated when the jackpot is won, and if the opening extension function is activated, the jackpot game based on the winning jackpot is determined regardless of the type of the winning jackpot. This is because an internal control process such as activating the open extension function is performed after the execution. That is, the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 can provide the “elevation mode” and the “retraction mode” only by confirming whether or not the opening extension function is activated when the big win is won. Thus, it is possible to provide an “elevation mode” and a “retraction mode” while suppressing an increase in the load on the CPU 711, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in variations. On the other hand, if the opening extension function is not activated when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery process, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, in the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the winning jackpot is executed It is determined whether the open extension function is activated.

[Variation time of special symbols]
By the way, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different variation times depending on whether or not the opening extension function is activated. In addition, when the opening extension function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed depends on the counter value (the so-called first reserved number) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Similarly, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the second special symbol differs depending on the counter value (so-called second reserved number) by the second special symbol hold counter 913.

  Specifically, in the external normal game state in which the release extension function does not operate, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is the counter value (first special symbol hold counter 903 at the start of variation) If the counter value after the counter value is subtracted with the start of the change) is 3, it is 3000 msec. If the counter value is 2, it is 7000 msec, and if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 11000 msec. In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is also the counter value (the variation is started by the second special symbol hold counter 913 at the start of the variation, similarly to the variation time of the first special symbol. Accordingly, if the counter value after subtraction of the counter value is 3, it is 3000 msec. If the counter value is 2, it is 7000 msec, and if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 11000 msec. Note that the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the case where the high expectation effect is performed is determined by the mode (type) of the high expectation effect.

  On the other hand, in the external advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state A, external advantageous gaming state B) in which the opening extension function is activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is the first variation time at the beginning of the variation. If the counter value by the 1 special symbol hold counter 903 (the counter value after the counter value is subtracted as the change starts) is 2 or 3, it is 2000 msec. If the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 7000 msec. Also, the variation time of the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is the counter value (the variation is started by the second special symbol hold counter 913 at the start of the variation, similarly to the variation time of the first special symbol. Accordingly, if the counter value after the counter value is subtracted is 2 or 3, it is 2000 msec. If the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 7000 msec.

  Thus, the special symbol variation time is significantly different between when the open extension function is activated and when it is not activated. Further, since the variation time of the special symbol can be grasped externally, the player determines whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to himself / herself based on the variation time of the special symbol. Accordingly, the player's willingness to continue the game is improved in the external advantageous gaming state, while the willingness to continue the game may be lost in the external normal gaming state. In addition, there are cases where the player is in an external normal game state and an internal advantageous game state as in the external normal game state B. Even in such a game state, the player is not advantageous to himself / herself. It will be judged that it is a gaming state. At this time, an unexpected jackpot can occur, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol-corresponding symbol corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153, the variation time of the special symbol-corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002, the variation time of the special symbol, Is almost the same time.

  In other words, in the external advantageous game state in which the opening extension function is activated, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153 is also determined by the number of lottery processes that are put on hold. More specifically, when the number of lottery processes that are put on hold is large, the time required for the variable display effect for the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is small (7000 ms). Thus, the variable display effect of the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is performed in a shortened variable display mode of less than “½” (2000 ms). When such a shortened variation display mode is employed, even if the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to variation display effects, for example, twice, the number of lottery processes is small (the counter value is 0 or 1). It is possible to shorten the time required for the first variation display effect for one time (7000 ms). In addition, if the player is informed that a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to variable display effects in the above-described shortened variable display mode, the player is expected to have a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. It is also possible.

[Direction display mode]
Next, representative ones of the effect display modes (including the variation pattern of the decorative symbols 1153) according to the lottery result of the special symbols executed in the effect display device 115 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to the drawings.

  In the “effect display mode”, an effect in which a character imitating a person sings music (hereinafter referred to as a character singing effect) may be executed. In the “character singing effect”, an image (including a moving image) representing the singing operation of the character is displayed on the effect display device 115, and various music pieces (here, music A to music G) are displayed from the speakers 144 and 341. Is output as audio.

  In addition, the “music piece” in the present embodiment includes three parts of an introduction part (intro part), a first half part, and a second half part, and one piece of music is configured as a whole by combining the parts. Specifically, the “introduction section (intro section)” is a musical tone at the beginning of a song, and makes the player conceive the title of the song and the subsequent musical tone. The “first half” is the musical sound of the part following the intro part of the music, and includes at least the first half of the main part (so-called rust part) of the music. The “second half” is the musical sound of the part following the first half of the music, and includes at least the second half of the main part (so-called chorus part) of the music.

  In this embodiment, the “music piece” is composed of an introduction part (intro part) and a main part (rust part), but may be a series of music from the introduction part to the end of the song. In addition, “musical sound” means a part of music. Accordingly, only the introduction part (intro part), only the first half part, and only the second half part correspond to musical sounds. Further, the musical sound is not limited to one phrase, and may be a plurality of phrases.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state (external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B) in which the opening extension function is not activated, and the external advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming) in which the opening extension function is activated. In the state A or the external advantageous game state B), the effect display mode (including the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153) accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is greatly different. Therefore, hereinafter, the external normal gaming state and the external advantageous gaming state are divided and each effect display mode will be specifically described.

[Variation pattern table]
The effect display mode based on the lottery result of special symbols (pending lottery) is the variation pattern (specifically, determined in each variation pattern setting process described above (see FIGS. 31, 32, 34 and 36). The variation pattern determined based on the selected variation pattern table is executed. Therefore, in the following, details of the effect display mode based on each variation pattern will be described with reference to the variation pattern name and variation number defined in each variation pattern table shown in FIG. 33, FIG. 35 and FIG. I will explain it.

  By the way, as apparent from the respective variation pattern setting processes shown in FIGS. 32, 34 and 36 and the respective variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 37, the operation of the internal probability variation function is performed. Regardless of the presence or absence, each table (each variation pattern) is selected from each variation pattern table depending on whether or not the external open extension function is activated. That is, even if the internal probability changing function is activated, the variation pattern that can be selected differs depending on whether the external open / extend function is activated. Specifically, even in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability changing function is activated, the opening extension function is not activated, and therefore the same variation pattern as that in the external normal gaming state B in which the probability varying function is not activated is selected. Further, in the external advantageous game state A in which the probability changing function is activated, since the open extension function is in operation, the same variation pattern as that in the external advantageous game state B in which the probability changing function is not activated is selected.

  In addition to the presence / absence of the opening extension function (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state), the winning types (first long opening big hit, second long opening big hit, third long opening big hit, first short Each table (each variation pattern) is selected from each variation pattern table depending on the open big hit, the second short open big hit, or the small hit. For this reason, an optimum variation pattern corresponding to the winning type is selected from each variation pattern table.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. 34, in the external advantageous gaming state, when the winning type is the second long open big hit, the variation pattern is selected in the same manner as the first long open big hit, so the second long open Even if it is a big hit, the probability variation confirmation table (A5) can be selected. On the other hand, in the external normal gaming state, when the winning type is the second long open jackpot, the variation pattern is selected differently from the first long open jackpot. That is, the probability variation confirmation table (A3) is not selected for the second long open jackpot. Note that the probability variation confirmation table (A3) and the probability variation confirmation table (A5) are tables in which only a variation pattern for deriving the confirmation of the first long open jackpot is selected. In other words, as described above, in the external advantageous gaming state (promotion mode and pull-back mode), the second long open jackpot is handled as being promoted to the first long open jackpot, so this table configuration and variation pattern selection is adopted. ing.

[Low expectation fluctuation when the open extension function is not activated]
First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the “low expectation variation” that is the most basic effect display mode in the external normal gaming state in which the opening extension function does not operate will be described. This “low-expectation deviating fluctuation” is a mode in which a deviation is derived as a lottery result without a high-expected production such as reach generation.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an effect display mode when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is derived to the effect display device in the external normal gaming state. That is, FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a mode before the start of variation of the decorative symbol 1153, FIG. 49B is a diagram illustrating a mode during variation of the decorative symbol 1153, and FIG. 49C is a variation number. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a stop mode of the decorative symbol 1153 based on “normal variation”, “shortening variation 1”, or “shortening variation 2” of 1 to 3, and FIG. 49D is a diagram showing a screen for deriving the establishment of reach. FIG. 49 (E) is a diagram illustrating a variation of the decorative symbol 1153 in a state where reach has been established.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of the change. Further, for example, in the hold display area 1150, the hold storage display portions 1151a to 1151d and 1152a to 1152b are in the second display mode or the third display mode, and the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (first It is shown that the sum of the counter value by one special symbol hold counter 903) and the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (count value by the second special symbol hold counter 913) is six. In the following, according to the holding order by each special symbol lottery means 900, 910, the symbol variation based on the lottery suspension by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (variation display of the first special symbol) and the second special symbol lottery means 910 Symbol variation based on the lottery suspension (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 49B, when the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is started in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol In the column 1153c, each symbol is changed in a vertical scrolling direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player), and in the middle symbol column 1153b, each symbol is switched on the spot. Variations are made in the manner. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b. If the variation corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation. On the other hand, if the variation corresponds to the second special symbol, the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation.

  Note that the number of holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is decremented by 1 due to the start of the change in the special symbol. The on-hold storage display units 1151a to 1151d and 1152a are shifted and displayed. Further, the display mode of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is set to the first display mode or non-display. As a result, in the hold display area 1150, it is shown that the hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is digested to be a total of five.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (C), the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are stopped at different symbols that are not related at all, and an “out” is derived. The display mode is “low-expected fluctuation” in the present embodiment. This “low-expected fluctuation” corresponds to any one of “normal fluctuation” of fluctuation number 1, “shortening fluctuation 1” of fluctuation number 2, and “shortening fluctuation 2” of fluctuation number 3.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the special feature lottery process is not performed when the opening extension function is inactive (when neither the big winning nor the small winning), it is determined whether or not to perform a high expectation effect. A lottery (high-expected production lottery). Next, when the high-expected production lottery is not won (in other words, when “execution of a normal off-effect” is selected), a “continuous production twice out” of a variation number 24 described later is executed. Whether or not is drawn (continuous production lottery). If the continuous production lottery is not won, the “low expectation variation” is executed for the variation time determined in accordance with the number of the lottery holds.

  More specifically, when “decrease in low expectation” is performed for the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the first special symbol, the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (counter by the first special symbol hold counter 903) If the value) is 0 or 1 after the pending digestion, the “normal fluctuation (variation time: 12000 ms)” of the variation number 1 is selected and executed. “Shortened fluctuation 1 (fluctuation time: 7000 ms)” is selected and executed, and if there are three after the suspended digestion, “shortened fluctuation 2 (fluctuation time: 3000 ms)” is selected and executed. Even when “decrease in low expectation” is performed on the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the second special symbol, the lottery holding number by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (count value by the second special symbol holding counter 913) is used. Similarly, the variation pattern is selected and executed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, in the external normal game state where the opening extension function does not operate, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play, if you win the continuous production lottery without winning the high expectation production lottery, As the “normally off effect”, “continuous effect twice off” of the variation number 24 is executed. Further, when the lottery for the continuous effect is not won, any one of “normal fluctuation” with a variation number 1, “shortening variation 1” with a variation number 2 and “shortening variation 2” with a variation number 3 is selected as the “unusual effect”. Is executed according to the number of reserved special symbols. As the number of reserved special symbols increases, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected, which suppresses the generation of so-called invalid spheres and prevents the occurrence of a state in which all of the special symbol reservations are digested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. .

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern of variation numbers 4 to 23 is selected and executed in the external normal game state in which the release extension function does not operate, the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are the same. 49D, the effect display device 115 displays a screen for deriving reach. In the state where reach is established as shown in FIG. 49 (E), only the middle symbol row 1153b of the decorative symbols 1153 fluctuates, and the symbol variation also continues in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Executed. Then, as described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

[Music reach production when the open extension function is not activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a “music reach effect” that is an effect display mode with reach when the external normal gaming state is executed will be described. This “music reach production” is a mode in which a win or miss is derived as a lottery result after performing a reach production using a part or all of a predetermined music.

  After the reach notification is made as described above (see FIG. 49D), the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the A song (see FIG. 49E) and the speaker 144. From 341, the introduction section of the A musical piece is output as audio. After the singing effect using the introduction section of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “off” is derived. The aspect corresponds to the variation number 4 “A music reach short out”. On the other hand, after the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in the same symbols as the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “big hit” (in detail, The effect display mode derived from winning the first to third long open big hits) corresponds to “A music reach / short hit” of the variation number 5. As described above, when the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped, the symbol variation in the special symbol-corresponding symbol 1000, 1002 is also stopped, and the lottery result of the special symbol indicated by the decorative symbol 1153 is the special symbol-corresponding symbol 1000, 1002. It is also notified by the stop symbol at.

  Here, after the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “out” is derived. However, when the symbol variation in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 is continuously performed, the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped. Then, the variation of the middle symbol row 1153b is resumed from the state in which the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, and the singing effect of the character is continued to be executed in the effect display device 115. Are continuously output from the introduction unit. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the A music piece is executed corresponds to “A music reach long out” of the variation number 6. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the A music piece is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is equivalent to the “A music reach long win” of the variation number 7. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the performance is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output audio from the introduction unit so that the main part (first half part and second half part) of the A musical piece is continuous from the introduction part. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the main part of the A music piece is executed corresponds to “A music reach / super long out” of the variation number 8. On the other hand, after the singing production using the main part of the A music piece is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is equivalent to the “variable number 9“ A music reach / very long ”” To do.

  Next, during the performance of the singing using the A-music introduction section, the effect display device 115 switches to and displays the introduction screen for B-music without stopping the symbol variation in the middle symbol row 1153b. At the same time, there is a case where the introduction part of B music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 in place of the A music (music switching effect to B music). Further, after the music switching effect using the B music introduction section is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to execute the singing effect of the character unique to the B music, and the speakers 144 and 341 transmit the B music. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the B music is executed corresponds to “B music reach / normal out” of the variation number 10. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the B music is performed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “B music reach / normal win” of the variation number 11. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the B music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the performance is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output sound so that the latter half of the B music is continued from the first half. An effect display mode in which “delay” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the B music is executed corresponds to “B music reach / development failure” of the variation number 12. On the other hand, after the singing production using the second half of the B music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to “B music reach / per development” of the variation number 13. .

  Next, while the music switching effect using the introduction part of the B music is being executed, the effect display device 115 switches and displays the introduction screen to the C music without stopping the symbol variation of the middle symbol row 1153b. In addition, there is a case where the introduction part of the C music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 instead of the B music (music switching effect to the C music). Furthermore, after the music switching effect using the C music introduction unit is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to execute the singing effect of the character unique to the C music, and the speakers 144 and 341 generate the C music effect. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the C music is executed corresponds to “C music reach / normal out” of the variation number 14. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the C music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to “C music reach / normal win” of the variation number 15. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the C music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the effect is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output the sound so that the latter half of the C music continues from the first half. The effect display mode in which “disappear” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the C music is executed corresponds to “C music reach / development failure” of the variation number 16. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the latter half of the C music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “C music reach / per development” of the variation number 17. .

  Next, while the music switching effect using the introduction unit of the C music is being executed, the effect display device 115 switches and displays the introduction screen to the D music without stopping the symbol variation of the middle symbol row 1153b. In addition, there is a case where the introduction portion of D music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 instead of C music (music switching effect to D music). Further, after the music switching effect using the D music introduction unit is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to perform the character singing effect unique to the D music, and the speakers 144 and 341 transmit the D music. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the D music is executed corresponds to “D music reach / normal out” of the variation number 18. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the D music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “D music reach / normal win” of the variation number 19. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the D music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the effect is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output sound so that the latter half of the D music is continued from the first half. The effect display mode in which “depart” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the D music is executed corresponds to “D music reach / development failure” of the variation number 20. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of the D music is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to “D music reach / per development” of the variable number 21. .

  After the reach notification (see FIG. 49D), the singing effect of the character unique to the G music is suddenly displayed on the effect display device 115 without performing the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music. As a result, the G music may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 as sound. Then, the effect display mode in which “off” is derived after the singing effect using the G music is executed corresponds to “G music reach out” of the variation number 22. On the other hand, after the singing effect using the G music is executed, scroll fluctuations (so-called full rotation fluctuations) are performed in a so-called double eye state in which all the symbols in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c are all in the same symbol. The effect display mode from which it is derived that “big hit” is won later corresponds to “G music reach / per full rotation” of the variation number 23.

  In this way, in the “music reach production” when the open extension function of the present embodiment is not operated, each reach production develops in stages (specifically, the variation time of special symbols is extended). Thus, each of the A to D music pieces can be output as a part continuous with the introduction part, the first half part, and the second half part. And as each part of A to D music is continuously output (that is, the singing effect of each music continues), the degree of expectation of winning the “big hit” is increased. Yes. Therefore, the player can enjoy the reach production while thinking that the singing production of each of the A to D music pieces is continued for a longer time, and the decrease in the interest is suppressed.

  In addition, in the “music reach production” when the open extension function is not activated according to the present embodiment, the degree of expectation that the “big hit” is won in the order of A song, B song, C song, and D song among the songs. It is configured to be high. Therefore, when a reach occurs or when a singing effect using the introduction part of A music is being executed, the player performs a music switching effect to B music, and further, music to C music or D music. Since the reach effect is watched while expecting the switching effect to be performed, a decrease in interest is suppressed.

[Continuous production n times when the open extension function is not activated]
Here, as described above, the continuous effect is that the special symbol is displayed only once on the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. In other words, it is an effect that appears as if the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 have been subjected to a variable display effect multiple times. In other words, the effect lottery means 960 of the peripheral control board 810 suggests the result of the lottery process to the player by performing the effect control related to the continuous effect. It should be noted that after the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a variable manner over a plurality of times, it is suggested that the winning symbol is hit or missed by a combination of stop symbols.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external normal gaming state is executed, the effect display that seems to have been derived from the winning or coming off after the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in multiple variations. The “continuous production n times production” which is an aspect will be described.

  First, similarly to the above description, the decoration symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of variation (see FIG. 49A). From this state, the variation display effect for the decoration symbol 1153 is assigned to the variation number 2 described above. The simulation is executed by simulating “shortening fluctuation 1” (7000 ms) (see FIG. 49B). Then, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a different symbol, and "displacement" is derived. However, the stop display at this time is in a temporary stop (interval) state, and the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 continue to display the variable symbols for the special symbol. And the fluctuation | variation of each symbol row | line | column 1153a-1153c is restarted from the state which this decoration symbol 1153 stopped temporarily. At this time, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is maintained without being subtracted. In the present embodiment, the temporary stop (interval) of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed for 1000 ms.

  Then, after the variation display effect for the decorative symbol 1153 is simulated again with the variation number 2 of “shortening variation 1” (7000 ms), each stop of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c is stopped. The variation in which the symbol stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated is equivalent to the above-mentioned variation number 24 of “out of two consecutive effects” (15000 ms). On the other hand, when the variation pattern of variation numbers 25-39 is selected and executed in the external normal gaming state where the release extension function does not operate, the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are the same. The effect display device 115 displays a screen for deriving reach (see FIG. 49D). Thereafter, a reach effect similar to the above-described “music reach effect” is executed based on various variation patterns.

  Thus, based on one hold related to the lottery result of the special symbol, the effect display mode in which the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is performed twice in succession is “continuous rendering”. It's called “Twice production”. In other words, during one variation of the special symbol based on one hold, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is performed pseudo twice. Similarly, based on one hold related to the special symbol lottery result, the effect display mode in which the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is performed three times in succession is “continuous production 3 "Direction".

  Specifically, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 6 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” corresponds to the variable number 25 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / long miss”. The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 7 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” corresponds to the variable number 26 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / long”, The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 9 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” corresponds to the variation number 27 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / super long hit”. Similarly, the effect display modes in which reach effects similar to the change numbers 10 to 21 are performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” correspond to the change patterns of the change numbers 28 to 39, respectively. Further, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the change number 9 is performed after the “successive effect 3 times effect” corresponds to the change number 40 “continuous effect 3 times / A music reach / very long”. Similarly, the effect display modes in which the reach effect similar to the change numbers 10 to 21 is performed after the “continuous effect 3 times effect” correspond to the change patterns of the change numbers 41 to 52, respectively.

[Special effect for small hits and short hits when the open extension function is not activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “small” is an effect display mode that is executed when a small hit or short win (first short open big hit and second short open big hit) is won in the external normal gaming state. The “win / short win special performance” will be described. The “special effect” is an effect display mode for deriving that a specific “win” is won in a special mode without going through the derivation of reach establishment by the decorative symbol 1153.

  FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are diagrams showing an effect display mode derived to the effect display device when winning a small hit or short open big hit in the external normal gaming state. That is, FIG. 50A is a diagram showing an aspect before the start of variation of the decorative symbol, FIG. 50B is a diagram illustrating an aspect during the variation of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 50C is a diagram illustrating the ranking board. FIG. 50D is a diagram showing a branching effect using the image, and FIG. 50D is a diagram showing a branching effect in which the costume of the character is converted. FIG. 51A is a diagram showing a branching effect in which the character's costume is converted following FIG. 50D, and FIG. 51B is an effect in which the character's costume is converted into a dress (white). FIG. 51C is a diagram showing an example, FIG. 51C is a diagram showing an effect screen in the time limit mode, FIG. 51D is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a character's costume is converted into a dress (red), FIG. (E) is a diagram showing an effect screen in the promotion mode, FIG. 51 (F) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a character's costume is converted into a space suit, and FIG. 51 (G) is a winner of the jackpot. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation screen to derive.

  First, similarly to the above description, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of the change (see FIG. 50A), and the change of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed from this state (see FIG. 50B). . Then, while the decoration pattern 1153 is changing, the effect display device 115 displays an image imitating a ranking board by switching to a normal background image, as shown in FIG. 50 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 50 (D) and 51 (A), the effect display device 115 performs an effect display in which the character's costume is converted into one of a plurality of patterns of costumes on the stage, After that, the decorative symbol 1153 (special symbol-corresponding symbol 1000, 1002) is stopped and displayed in the form of “out”. Then, the subsequent mode is derived by the costume finally worn by the character by the effect display shown in FIG. 50 (D) and FIG. 51 (A).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), when the character's costume is converted into a dress (white) by the effects shown in FIG. 50 (D) and FIG. Corresponds to “per hit / per special change”. The “small hit / special variation per” is a game effect mode that is selected and executed when a special hit or a second short open big win is won in the special symbol lottery process. Therefore, after the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 based on the small hit or the second short opening jackpot, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the gaming state shifts to the aforementioned “time limit mode”.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), when the character's costume is converted into a dress (red) by the effects shown in FIGS. 50 (D) and 51 (A), “2R jackpot / It corresponds to “per special variation”. The “2R jackpot / special variation hit” is a game effect mode that is selected and executed when the first short open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process. Therefore, after the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 based on the first short opening jackpot, the gaming state shifts to the above-described “promotion mode” as shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the “small hit / short hit special effect” at the time of the opening extension non-operation of the present embodiment, an effect display in a special mode different from the above-described normal fluctuation or reach effect is performed. Then, while the player can grasp that he / she has won a small hit or short open big hit without depending on the stop symbol of the decorative design 1153, on the other hand, if he / she wins a small hit or second short open big hit, which was won? It is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the “time limit mode”.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, “15R big hit / special change re-variation per” of variation number 55 is provided as “special effect” different from other fluctuation patterns other than “small hit / short hit special effect”. . This "15R jackpot / special change per change" is a variation pattern that is determined to be won for the first long open jackpot, and has significance as a premier performance with a very low appearance rate.

  In the effect display mode based on the variation number 55 “15R jackpot / special variation re-variation”, the same effect (see FIG. 50) as the variation number 53 “small hit / special variation re-variation” is performed. In the display device 115, “displacement” is once derived by the decorative symbol 1153. Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (F), after the re-variation by the decorative design 1153, the character's costume was converted into a space suit by the effects shown in FIGS. 50 (D) and 51 (A). When the “big hit” is derived by the specific symbol, an effect screen for deriving the winning for the “big hit” is displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (G).

  Thus, the variation number 55 “15R jackpot / special variation per variation” has the following significance as well as a mere premier effect. In other words, the variation mode of the hit value having the greatest value for the player (first long open jackpot) and the hit value having the smallest value for the player (small hit) are made to be very similar or identical to each other. Thus, it is possible to give the player great surprise and joy by deriving that the player has won the first long open jackpot by re-variation while discouraging the player once winning the jackpot.

[Low-expectation fluctuation and double fluctuation effect when opening extension function is activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external advantageous gaming state is being executed, it is an effect display mode for deriving a disengagement as a lottery result without accompanying a high expectation effect. An explanation will be given of “off-change” and “twice-change effect” which is an effect display mode in which the “open extension extended / low expected off-change” is executed twice in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an effect display mode when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is derived to the effect display device in the external advantageous gaming state. That is, FIG. 52 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative pattern 1153 before the start of variation, FIG. 52 (B) is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during variation, and FIG. 52 (C) is a variation number. FIG. 52 (D) is a diagram showing a temporary stop of the decoration pattern 1153 based on the “opening extension / normal fluctuation” and “opening extension / shortening fluctuation” of FIGS. FIG. 52 (E) is a diagram showing a second mode), FIG. 52 (E) is a diagram showing a stop mode based on “during open extension / twice out of fluctuation” of the decorative pattern 1153, and FIG. 52 (F) shows a special light emission effect. Figure.

  As described above, in the external advantageous game state (when the extended extension function is activated), the effect display device 115 displays the silhouette of the character on the dark background image and configures the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153a to 1153c). Each symbol to be displayed is attached to a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and changes so that the front and back of the character appear alternately (however, scrolling changes in the pull-back mode). Thus, by adopting a display mode in which the decorative symbol 1153 and the background image are greatly different from the external normal game state (when the open extension function is not activated), the player can play the external advantageous game state (when the open extension function is activated). It is possible to clearly grasp that and to give a sense of superiority.

  First, as shown in FIG. 52A, the decorative design 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of the change. Further, for example, in the hold display area 1150, the hold storage display portions 1151a to 1151d and 1152a to 1152b are in the second display mode or the third display mode, and the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (first It is shown that the total of the number of lots to be held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 913) is six. In the following, according to the holding order by each special symbol lottery means 900, 910, the symbol variation based on the lottery suspension by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (variation display of the first special symbol) and the second special symbol lottery means 910 Symbol variation based on the lottery suspension (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 52B, when the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is started in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the symbol columns 1153a to 1153c The variable display effect is performed in such a manner that each symbol is switched on the spot. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the stop symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are different symbols that are completely unrelated and stop at approximately the same timing, and “disconnect” occurs. The derived effect display mode is “during extended opening / low expected fluctuation”. The “open extension / low expected deviation fluctuation” corresponds to the fluctuation number 56 “open extension extension / normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation number 57 “open extension extension / shortening fluctuation”. In the same way as described above, the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 are also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation, and the lottery result of each special symbol is derived.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery process is not performed when the opening extension function is activated, whether or not to execute the effect display mode with the reach effect is selected (high expectation effect lottery). . Next, when the lottery is not won in the high expectation effect lottery, “open extension extended / low expectation fluctuation” is selected and executed according to the number of pending lotteries.

  More specifically, in the case of performing “open extension extended / low expected deviation fluctuation” for the first special symbol, the number of lottery holds by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (count value by the first special symbol hold counter 903) However, if it is 0 or 1 based on the post-pending digestion, the variable number 56 “During open extension / normal fluctuation” is selected and executed, and if it is 2 or 3 based on the post-pending digestion, the variable number 57 “Opening extended / shortening fluctuation” is selected and executed. The same applies to the case of performing “low-expected fluctuation when the opening extension function is activated” for the second special symbol based on the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 913). The variation pattern is selected and executed. Note that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to be shorter than that of the fluctuation number 56 “opening extension / shortening fluctuation” than the fluctuation number 56 “opening extension / normal fluctuation”. In addition, the variation number 56 “opening extension / normal variation” and the variation number 57 “opening extension / shortening variation” are both places where each symbol row 1153a to 1153c stops after the decorative symbol 1153 changes. In the variation number 56 of “open extension extended / normal variation”, the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b stop in this order, while the variation number 57 “open extension extended / shortening variation” 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b are different in that they stop almost simultaneously.

  As in the case of the external normal gaming state, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is decremented by 1 due to the start of the change of the special symbol. Here, in the hold storage display portions 1151b to 1151d and 1152a to 1152b, respectively. Each display mode is shift-displayed on each previous storage storage display unit 1151a to 1151d, 1152a. Further, the display mode of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is set to the first display mode or non-display. As a result, in the hold display area 1150, one lottery hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or one lottery hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is digested, and the total number of these holds is five. Is shown.

  On the other hand, after the variation display of the decoration symbol 1153 based on the variation number 57 “during open extension / shortening variation” is performed (see FIG. 52 (B)), each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a different symbol. Although “displacement” is derived (see FIG. 52C), the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped (interval) in which the symbol variation in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 is continuously performed. (Such as “Opening extended, twice off”). In this case, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), from the state where the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “opening extension / shortening variation” of the variation number 57 is executed again. At this time, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is maintained without being subtracted. In the present embodiment, the temporary stop (interval) of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed for 1000 msec.

  Then, after the second decoration symbol 1153 shown in FIG. 52 (D) is changed, as shown in FIG. 52 (E), each symbol row 1153a to 1153c stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated. The fluctuation corresponds to the fluctuation number 58 “During opening extension / off twice fluctuation”. On the other hand, in the external advantageous game state in which the opening extension function is activated, when the variation pattern of the variation numbers 59 to 96 is selected and executed, the “special light emission effect” shown in FIG. Is executed. This “special light emission effect” is an effect for deriving the occurrence of reach when the open extension function is activated, and in the effect display device 115, an image effect in which a plurality of lights extend radially from the center of the screen toward the outer edge. At the same time, various lightings provided on the game board 4 are controlled to emit light in conjunction with the image effects.

  Note that the variation number 58 “extended extension / twenty variation out” is a variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play in the external advantageous gaming state and the lottery of the high expectation effect lottery is won. It is. In other words, in the external advantageous game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out and the high-expected production lottery is won, the variation number 58 “Extended opening extended / Fluctuated twice” is selected. If it is done, reach will not be established and “displacement” will be derived. In this way, by providing “twice out of fluctuation”, continuous fluctuation of “out” is frequently performed in the external advantageous gaming state, and it seems that the fluctuation is performed without interruption of the lottery hold. it can.

  By the way, in the external advantageous gaming state, every time a high-expected production lottery is won even though the special symbol lottery result is out, an effect display mode based on a variation pattern with a long variation time, such as establishment of reach, was performed. In such a case, the time required for the next lottery process after the lottery process is performed cannot be shortened, and the player can fully enjoy the merit (such as high lottery efficiency) in the external advantageous gaming state. It becomes impossible to feel (enjoy). In this regard, the possibility that the decorative display 1153 may be a continuous effect as if the variable display effect of the decorative symbol 1153 is performed a plurality of times during the period from when the special symbol is variably displayed to when it is stopped is displayed. If so, it is possible to suggest that the player has a high expectation for the jackpot, even though it is a short time. In this way, if the direct performance is performed in such a way as to positively suggest the player with a high expectation degree to the jackpot, many lotteries will be made before the jackpot is won in the external advantageous game state. Even if processing must be performed, the interest of the game can be suitably maintained while maintaining the lottery efficiency. In other words, even if the high-expectation effect lottery is won, it is possible to make it appear that the shortening variation is being performed smoothly and quickly by making it possible to frequently select “twice out of fluctuation”.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (B) and FIG. 52 (D), the character imitating UFO is enlarged on the effect display device 115 so as to approach the near side from the back side of the screen during the variation display of the decorative pattern 1153. May be displayed (UFO production). And in FIG. 52 (B) (the first pseudo variation), it is suggested that the UFO effect has a high expectation that the variation display of the decorative symbol 115 will continue to be performed again without stopping the variation display of the special symbol. (That is, the degree of expectation that the “twice fluctuation effect” is performed increases). It should be noted that this UFO effect may be performed even though the above-described continuous effect is not performed (so-called “gase effect”).
Further, in FIG. 52D (second pseudo variation), when this UFO effect is performed, it is shown that the degree of expectation that the “special light emission effect” will be executed after that is high (that is, reach occurs). Expectation increases). In other words, in the external advantageous gaming state of the present embodiment (when the extended extension function is activated), it is necessary that the “special light emission effect” is always performed via the “twice fluctuation effect” (and the jackpot is further increased). Derived condition). Therefore, when UFO effects are continuously generated, the degree of expectation that a jackpot is derived is increased, and the excitement of the player can be suppressed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the above-mentioned continuous effect may be performed without going through the UFO effect. That is, when continuous display is performed in such a manner, it can be difficult to detect that the “twice variation effect” is being performed as viewed from the player, and based on the “twice variation effect”. It becomes possible to make the pseudo two-time fluctuation appear to be different independent fluctuations (that is, fluctuations based on different lottery suspensions), so that the lottery efficiency can be improved. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect display mode with the reach effect is not selected by lottery in the external advantageous gaming state (when the extended extension function is activated), “Open extended / low expected disappointment” As the “variation”, variation number 56 of “opening extension / normal variation” or variation number 57 of “opening extension / shortening variation” is executed according to the number of reserved special symbols. In view of the fact that the lottery hold tends to increase in the external advantageous game state, if the number of held balls for each special symbol is large, a variation pattern with a very short variation time will be selected. This can suppress the decrease in interest.

  On the other hand, when the digestion of the hold is promoted in the external advantageous game state, all of the hold of each special symbol is consumed and a period in which the decorative symbol 1153 is not displayed is generated, resulting in a decrease in interest. There is a fear. Therefore, by increasing the rate at which “Extended Opening / Twice Fluctuation” is selected and executed, it is possible to make the decorative symbol 1153 easily changeable regardless of the number of lottery reservations. The decrease can be suppressed.

  When the variation patterns with the variation numbers 59 to 96 are selected and executed, after the “special lighting effect”, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop at the same symbol and only the middle symbol row 1153b changes. At the same time, the symbol variation is continuously executed in each of the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Then, as described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the external advantageous gaming state is being executed, there is an effect display mode in which “open extension extended / low anticipation fluctuation” is continuously executed in a pseudo manner twice. The description will be made with reference to FIG. 53 regarding “opening extension and deviation twice fluctuation” (variation number 58). FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing the control mode when the effect control relating to the above-mentioned “during opening extension / off twice fluctuation” is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, at the timing t1, the number of lottery processes in which the hold is released and put on hold is, for example, “4” to “3”. If it becomes, in the special symbol indicators 84 and 86, the variable display about a special symbol is started. The variation display of the special symbol is continuously performed until timing t4 when 5000 ms has elapsed since the variation display was started. At this timing t4, the special symbol variation display is stopped so that it can be recognized that it is out of place.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 115, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), a variable display effect for a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is started at the timing t1. However, at the timing t2 when 2000 ms has elapsed since the start of the variation display effect, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 subjected to the variation display effect are temporarily stopped (although the variation display of the special symbol is continued). (Display mode that makes it appear as if it has completely stopped) (simulated first variation display effect). Further, at the timing t3 when the temporary stop state (interval) is maintained for “1000 ms”, the variable display effect of the plurality of temporarily stopped decorative symbols 1153 is resumed even though the hold is not released. (2nd variation display effect). Then, at a timing t4 when 2000 ms has elapsed since the restart of the variable display effect, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are stopped (completely stopped) in such a manner that it is suggested to the player that they are out of place ( Second variation display effect simulated). As described above, both the simulated first and second variation display effects are performed for the same time as the time (2000 ms) required for the “opening extension / shortening variation” (variation number 57). .

  As described above, in the case of “open extension extended / off twice fluctuation” (variation number 58), the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 display the special symbol during the period from when the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. However, the effect control is performed so that the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to the variable display effect in the shortened variable display mode twice. Therefore, for example, when the player is made aware that such a continuous effect is being performed by a notice effect such as the UFO effect, the “opening extension / normal” It is possible to indicate to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than “During extended opening / normal fluctuation”, while the time (5000 ms) is shorter than the time required for “variation” (7000 ms). Become. And when a highly anticipated performance is performed in an external advantageous game state, this “extended extension, twice fluctuation deviation” (variation number 58) should be actively adopted with a probability (752/1000) exceeding 50%. Therefore, it is possible to greatly reduce the time required for the next lottery process to be performed after the lottery process is performed while performing highly anticipated performances at a high frequency. The above-described lottery efficiency in the gaming state can be appropriately improved. In other words, by proactively adopting such “during open extension / deviating twice fluctuation” (variation number 58), high-expected performances are played at the same frequency in the external advantageous game state and the external normal game state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed before the jackpot is won in the external advantageous gaming state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game suitably.

  In addition, the first (and second) variable display effect that is simulated is the time (2000 ms) required for “opening extended / shortening fluctuation” (variation number 57) that is actually performed when the number of holds is large. It was done over the same amount of time. For this reason, for example, when the player does not appeal to the player that such a continuous effect is being performed, such as when the UFO effect is not performed, the player may perform the lottery process in the hold state. Even when the number of processes (the number of holdings) is small, the illusion is that a variable display effect is being executed in a situation where the number of holdings is large. In other words, even if there is a situation in which a game ball is not easily entered into the start opening 600, 602, 604 in spite of being in an external advantageous game state, such a continuous production is performed. The player feels as if the game balls are successively inserted into the start ports 600, 602, and 604, and a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Music reach production when the open extension function is activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a music reach effect that is an effect display mode with reach when the external advantageous game state is executed will be described. This music reach effect is a mode in which a win or miss is derived as a lottery result after performing a reach effect using a part or all of a predetermined music.

  After the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” (see FIG. 52 (F)), the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 6 is performed is “ Equivalent to “Extended Opening / A Music Reach / Long”, and the effect display mode in which the same reach effect as the change number 7 is performed corresponds to “Open Extension Extended / A Song Reach / Long”, The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to that of the variable number 8 is performed corresponds to the variable number 63 “opening extension / A music reach / extra-long off”, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 9 is performed. Corresponds to the variable number 64 “Opening extended, A music reach, per super long”.

  In addition, a reach effect similar to “Opening extension / A music reach / long” is performed, and after “decreased” is derived in a manner in which the symbol is shifted by one frame by the decorative symbol 1153, the frame is shifted by one frame. The game effect mode in which the symbol is reverse-scrolled by one frame and “big hit” (so-called “return hit”) is derived corresponds to the variable number 61 “opening extension / A song reach / long return”. In addition, the same reach production as “Opening extension / A music reach / long” is performed, and after “decreased” is once derived by the decorative symbol 1153, the decorative symbol 1153 is re-varied, "(So-called per change) game effect mode is equivalent to a change number 62" Opening extended, A music reach, per long change ". In addition, a reach effect similar to that of “Extended Opening / A Music Reach / Super Long” is performed, and the game effect mode in which “Big Bonus” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variation number 65 “Extended Opening”・ Equivalent to “A song reach / per-long change”.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the E music, and from the speakers 144 and 341, E The first half of the music may be output as audio. The effect display mode in which “off” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the E music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended, E music reach, short out” of the variation number 66. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the E music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variation number 67 “Opening extension / E music reach / short hits” Is equivalent to. Further, after the singing effect using the first half of the E music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is resumed, and the effect display device 115 performs the singing effect of the character. Is continuously executed, and audio may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the second half of the E music is continuous from the first half. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the E music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended / E music reach / developed out” of the variation number 68. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of this E music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 69 “Opening extended, E music reach, per development” Is equivalent to.

  Here, in the reach effect in which the singing effect using the E music is executed, unlike the reach effect in which the singing effect using the other music is executed, the symbols constituting the decorative pattern 1153 are “3” and It is limited to a specific symbol of “5”. That is, the “big hit” derived after the reach effect is executed is limited to the first long open big hit. In other words, when the “big hit” is derived by the reach effect in which the singing effect using the E music is executed, the first long open jackpot that is most advantageous to the player is determined, and therefore the reach effect is executed. And the player's expectations are greatly increased, and the interest is improved.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153, and the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the F music, and the speakers 144, 341 The first half of the music may be output as audio. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the F music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended, F music reach, normal out” of the variation number 70. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the F music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 71 “Opening extension / F music reach / normal winning” Is equivalent to. In addition, while the reach production similar to “Opening extension / F music reach / normal” is performed, the game effect mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variation number 72 “Opening extension / It corresponds to “per F music reach normal re-variation”.

  Further, after the singing effect using the first half of the F music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is resumed, and the effect display device 115 performs the singing effect of the character. Is continuously executed, and audio may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the second half of the F music is continuous from the first half. After the singing production using the latter half of this F-music is performed, the production display mode from which “out” is derived is “various open 76, F music reach, development outage 2 (double only)” Also, the variable number 78 corresponds to “Opening extension, F music reach, development failure 3”. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of this F-music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 73 “Opening extension, F-music reach, per development” It corresponds to “1”, variable number 75 “2 during extension extension / F music reach / development (only for triple)” and variable number 77 “3 during extension extension / F music reach / development”. In addition, while the reach production similar to “Opening extension / F music reach / development” is performed, the game presentation mode in which “big hit” is derived in the form of return is the variation number 74 “Opening extension / F Equivalent to 1 ”per song reach / return.

  Here, in the reach effect in which the singing effect using the F music is executed, unlike the reach effect in which the singing effect using another music is executed, the reach arrangement (line) by the decorative design 1153 is 2 May be line (double) or 3 lines (triple). Thus, by arranging a plurality of reach arrangements (lines) based on the decorative symbols 1153, it is possible to give the player an impression that “big hit” is easily derived. In other words, in the reach production in which the singing production using the F music is executed, the player's expectation for the “big hit” is greatly increased, compared to the reach production in which the singing production using the other music is executed. Will improve.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 49 is performed is the variable number 79 “Opening extension / D music” The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to that of the variable number 50 is performed corresponds to “reaching / normal deviation”, and the variable number 80 corresponds to “open extension extended / D music reach / long”, and is similar to the variable number 51 The effect display mode in which the reach effect is performed corresponds to the variable number 82 “Opening extension / D music reach / development failure”, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 52 is performed is “Open” Equivalent to “Extended, D Music Reach, Per Development”. In addition, while the reach production similar to “During extension open / D music reach / normal” is performed, the game effect mode in which “big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variable extension 81 This corresponds to “per D music reach / normal re-variation”. In addition, a reach production similar to “During opening extension / D music reach / development” is performed, and a game presentation mode in which “big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is shown as “ D music reach / per-developed change.

  Here, as described above, in the external normal game state (when the opening extension function is not activated), the reach effect in which the singing effect using the D music is executed among the A music to the D music is the most “big hit”. Expectation is high. Therefore, even in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated), if a reach effect is performed in which a singing effect using D music is performed, the expectation for “big hit” is high, In the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the player can give an impression that the D music is a music having a special value. Furthermore, the above-described “elevation mode” is also a game mode in which the D music is used as a motif, so that the D music can further have significance as a special music that improves the player's expectation.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 22 is performed is the variable number 85 “Opening extended / G music” An effect display mode in which a reach effect similar to that of the variable number 23 is performed corresponds to “reach out of reach”, and a variable number 86 “opening extension / G music reach / per full rotation”.

  Here, there is “medley reach” for performing a singing effect using a plurality of music pieces as a special music reach effect when the opening extension function is activated. Hereinafter, “medley reach” will be described.

  First, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, the effect display device 115 displays an introduction image to “medley reach”, and the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153. Further, in the effect display device 115, after the introduction image to the A song is displayed, the singing effect of the character unique to the A song is displayed, and the introduction or first half of the A song is displayed from the speakers 144 and 341. Sound is output. An effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing production using the introduction part or the first half of this A music piece is executed is “various open 87, medley reach, short hit (A music piece)” ”Or the variable number 88“ Opening extension, medley reach, hit (A song) ”.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the A music is immediately interrupted, and the display image is switched from the introduction image to the A music to the introduction image to the B music. B music may be output as audio. Then, in the effect display device 115, the singing effect of the character unique to the B music is displayed, and the introduction part or the first half of the B music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 as audio. After the singing production using the introduction part or the first half part of the B music is performed, the production display mode in which “winning” is derived is “various opening 89, medley reach, short per (B music) "Or" No. 90 during opening extension, medley reach, hit (B music) ".

  In addition, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the B music is immediately interrupted and switched from the introduction image to the B music to the introduction image to the C music, and the B music is changed from the speakers 144 and 341. C music may be output as audio. Then, in the effect display device 115, the singing effect of the character unique to the C music is displayed, and the introduction part or the first half of the C music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 by voice. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing effect using the introduction part or the first half part of the C music is executed is the variable number 91 “opening extended / medley reach / short (C music) ”Or the variable number 92“ Opening extension / medley reach / win (C music) ”.

  In addition, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the C music is immediately interrupted and switched from the introduction image to the C music to the introduction image to the D music, and the C music is changed from the speakers 144 and 341. D music may be output as audio. Then, in the effect display device 115, the singing effect of the character unique to the D music is displayed, and the introduction part or the first half of the D music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 as audio. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing effect using the introduction part or the first half part of the D music is executed is the variable number 93 “During opening extension / medley reach / short (D music) ”Or the variable number 94“ Opening extension / medley reach / win (D music) ”.

  It should be noted that after the above “medley reach” is performed, the effect display mode in which “out” is finally derived corresponds to the variable number 95 “during open extension / medley reach / off”. In addition, after the above-mentioned “Medley Reach” is made, the game performance mode in which “Big Bonus” is derived in the form of re-variation corresponds to the variable number 96 “Under extended medley reach / per re-variation” .

  Thus, in the external advantageous gaming state, the reach effect is always displayed on the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. Nevertheless, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are performed after the variable display effect is performed twice in the shortened variable display mode. In particular, the time required for the “change during opening / shortening variation” (variation number 57) that is actually performed when the number of holdings is large (first variation display effect before the second reach effect is simulated) (variation number 57) 2000 ms) for the same amount of time. For this reason, for example, when the UFO effect is not performed, and when such a continuous effect is performed without appealing to the player, the player receives 2 on the basis of one hold. It seems that the variable display effects are performed separately. In addition, when a highly variable display effect such as a reach effect is performed, the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a pseudo manner continuously several times based on one hold, so at the time of the reach effect, The variation time of the decorative pattern 1153 becomes longer, and the occurrence of a state in which there is no lottery hold can be suppressed.

  By the way, in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is selected regardless of whether it is a small win, a first short open big hit or a second short open big hit in the special symbol lottery process. The gaming state after the opening / closing operation is maintained in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated). For this reason, regardless of whether the winning is the small hit, the first short open big hit, or the second short open big hit, a substantially similar game effect mode is derived without distinguishing the winning type. That is, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, an effect screen is displayed on the effect display device 115 indicating that either the small hit, the first short open big hit, or the second short open big hit has been won. , The game effect mode from which “out” is derived corresponds to the variation number 97 of “opening extended / small hit / per normal variation” or the variation number 98 of “opening extended / 2R big hit / normal variation per”. .

  In addition, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the change number 55 is performed after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is performed corresponds to the change number 99 “open extension extended, 15R big hit, normal change per change” To do.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the following many excellent effects can be obtained. The effects (1) to (12) listed below are examples of effects obtained by the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

  (1) When it is determined that a high expectation effect (second variation display effect) with a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot should not be performed in the external advantageous game state (chance game state) (step S1530: effect contents) Judgment means) decides the number of lottery processes in the hold state (step S1550). As a result, when the number of the lottery processing is large (see FIG. 37: the number of holdings “2” and “3”), the time required for the variable display effect for the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is the number of the lottery processings. (See FIG. 37: the number of holdings “0”, “1”) is a shortened variation display mode (“2000 ms” versus “7000 ms” in the above embodiment) that is less than “½”. Thus, the above-described variation display effect is performed (normal variation execution means). As a result, the time required from the lottery process to the next lottery process is greatly reduced, and the above-described lottery efficiency in the chance gaming state can be appropriately improved. become.

  (2) After adopting the shortened variation display mode described in the effect (1) above, it takes a longer time than the normal variation (7000 ms) required in the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state). By performing the high-expected performance, means for indicating to the player that the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal variation (FIG. 35: variation numbers 59, 63, 66, 68, 70, 76, 78, In addition to the first special change execution means for effect control corresponding to 79, 82, 85, and 95), means for performing a highly expected effect in a shorter time (5000 ms) than the time required for the normal change (7000 ms) ( FIG. 35: a second special variation executing means for performing effect control corresponding to the variation number 58). Then, when a high expectation effect is performed in the external advantageous gaming state, the high expectation effect is generated by the first special variation execution means, as is apparent from the distribution ratio of the variation mode determination random numbers in the variation pattern table H5. The second probability (752/1000) that the high expectation effect is performed by the second special variation executing means is higher than the first probability (248/1000) that is performed. In other words, when the above-described shortened variation display mode is adopted, even when a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to variation display effects twice, when the number of lottery processes is small (see FIG. 37: number of holds “0”) "," 1 ") can be made shorter than the time (7000 ms) required for the one-time variation display effect. In addition, it is possible to indicate to the player that the degree of expectation is high by causing the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 to be subjected to variable display effects a plurality of times in the shortened variable display mode. In this regard, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the special symbol is displayed only once on the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. The lottery process in which the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are put in the on-hold state by performing the effect control so that the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to the variable display effect in the shortened variable display mode twice. Is shorter (5000 ms) than the time (7000 ms) required for “opening extension / normal fluctuation” (see FIG. 37) performed when the number of processes is small (see FIG. 37: pending number “0”, “1”) However, it is possible to perform a variable display effect on the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 while indicating to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than “During opening extension / normal fluctuation”. And the. When the highly anticipated effect is performed in the external advantageous gaming state, since the variable display effect of this short time (5000 ms) is positively adopted (752/1000), the lottery process is performed. The time required until the next lottery process is performed can be greatly shortened, and the above-described lottery efficiency in the external advantageous gaming state can be appropriately improved.

  (3) According to the configuration adopting the shortened variation display mode described in the effect of (2) above, the expectation to the jackpot is high in the external normal gaming state and in the external advantageous gaming state. Even if the high-expected performance is performed at the same frequency (in the above embodiment, “1/14” versus “1 / 10.5 to 1/15”), the lottery efficiency in the chance gaming state is greatly reduced. There is no end to it. In other words, in the effect display device 115, it is possible to avoid the fact that only the variable display effect in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is low is repeatedly performed, so that the jackpot is won unfortunately in the external advantageous gaming state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed by the time, the interest of the game is suitably maintained.

  (4) When performing the effect control so that a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to the variable display effect twice in the shortened variable display mode, the effect display device 115 approaches the near side from the back side of the screen. An effect that a character imitating UFO is enlarged and displayed (a UFO effect that is a specific notice effect) is performed at a predetermined frequency. For this reason, the player can more reliably detect that the high expectation production with a high degree of expectation for the jackpot is performed at an early stage, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed. It becomes like this.

  (5) When a reach effect is performed as a continuous effect, the variable display for the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is performed in such a manner that the reach effect is performed only in the last variable display effect among a plurality of simulated variable display effects. Production control for production was performed. For example, if the above-mentioned variable display effect is performed three times during a period from when the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped and displayed (whether the one variable display effect is a three-time variable display effect) If the simulation is performed in a simulated manner, the first variation display effect to be simulated and the second variation display effect are not performed in the reach, and only in the third variation display effect to be simulated. We decided to conduct a reach. That is, in this case, the time required for the variable display effect other than the last variable display effect to be simulated is a relatively short time, and it is avoided that the entire time required for a plurality of variable display effects is unnecessarily long. It becomes like this.

  (6) When the first long open jackpot or the second long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous game state (chance game state), the above-described continuous performance is always performed (steps S15209 and S15210). That is, when a continuous effect is performed by the special effect control means, the expectation that the jackpot is won is higher than when the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are varied and displayed only once by the normal effect control means. It was made to become. Therefore, when a highly anticipated effect is performed in the chance game state, the player is temporarily aware that the one-time variation display effect is performed as if it were a plurality of variations of the display effect. Even if it stops, it will be suppressed that the interest of a game will fall by this.

  (7) In the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state), the lottery processing for the jackpot (in this embodiment, with the winning probability A adopted at the time of the initial (when the initialization processing of the RAM 713 is performed) A series of processes including the process of determining the winning type according to the design random number), and when the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the winning probability B higher than the corresponding selection probability A 37. A situation where the player is suggested to be in the same gaming state (a situation where the player is suggested to be in a predetermined single gaming state (external normal gaming state), FIG. (C), see FIG. 38), the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the double standard of the winning probability A and the winning probability B (double standard lottery means). Therefore, even if the player is in the external normal game state (normal game state) that appears even at the time of the initial, the player wins a surprise win in which the above jackpot is won in a small number of lotteries since the previous jackpot game was played. As a result, it becomes easier to enjoy the so-called jackpot ream. Above all, as a price to make it possible to expect such a long game in the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state), for example, the winning probability of winning the jackpot may be lower than the winning probability A adopted at the initial time, etc. Even if the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state) is repeated continuously, such a state is continued, so that a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

  (8) When the above-mentioned double standard lottery means shifts from the gaming state in which the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is performed to the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state), the winning probability A and the winning probability B It is decided internally according to the winning type of the jackpot, and the period from the transition to the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state) until the next jackpot is won Only the determined winning probability is adopted to perform the lottery process for the jackpot. For example, when the second long open jackpot is won, the above winning probability B is adopted, or when the third long open jackpot is won, the above winning probability A is adopted internally. In addition, during the period from the transition to the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state) until the next jackpot is won, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed using only the determined winning probability. . Therefore, each time the lottery process for the jackpot is performed, it is possible to suitably reduce the calculation load for the lottery process for the jackpot as compared with the case of determining which probability should be adopted as the winning probability. become.

  (9) When the second short open jackpot (per normal state transition) is won, the effect image indicating that the jackpot is won is not displayed on the display surface of the effect display device (effect image display device) 115 Originally, the jackpot game corresponding to the hit is executed so that the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls by opening and closing the jackpot game opening / closing device 500. In addition, when the small hit (per state maintenance) is won (selected), the open / close operation for the big hit game (open / close device) 500 is approximated to the open / close operation for the short open big hit (approximate) Game execution means). In addition, a predetermined period (external normal gaming state B) after the jackpot game (opening / closing operation of the short opening jackpot) that is executed when the second short opening jackpot (per normal state transition) is executed is the initial The lottery process for the jackpot is performed with a winning probability B that is higher than the jackpot winning probability A that is sometimes adopted (high-precision lottery means). Then, after the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 500 is opened / closed by either the second game execution means or the approximate game execution means, “all eight letters of alphabet within a predetermined time indicated in advance” A time limit mode (high expectation command effect mode) in which an instruction to achieve a specific effect condition such as “change to colored display” is effect-displayed on the display surface of the effect display device (effect image display device) 115 ) To perform production control (high expectation production control means). According to such a configuration, in the time limit mode (high expectation command effect mode), whether or not the lottery processing by the high-precision lottery means is performed by winning the second short open big hit (per normal state transition), or A lottery process is performed under a situation in which the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state) is maintained by winning (selection) for small wins (per state maintenance). That is, when the lottery process by the high-precision lottery means is performed, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with a winning probability B that is higher than the jackpot winning probability A adopted at the time of the initial, It is possible to suitably secure the degree of expectation to the jackpot when shifting to the time limit mode (high expectation command effect mode), and as a result, the interest of the game in the time limit mode (high expectation command effect mode) The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, under the configuration in which the double standard lottery means is adopted, either the winning of the second short open big hit (per normal state transition) or the winning (selection) of the small win (per state maintenance) Even if the time limit mode (high expectation command effect mode) is entered as an opportunity, a big hit expectation is expected as compared with the case where it is determined from the player's viewpoint that the lottery process is performed only with the winning probability A. The degree can be dramatically increased.

  (10) In the external normal game state, when either the second long open big hit or the third long open big win is won, a big win game is executed that prompts the player to pay out a fixed amount of game balls. After the jackpot game is executed, the operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 operate is shifted to an external normal game state (normal game state) which is the same as that at the initial time. On the other hand, when the first short open jackpot (awakening) is won, a jackpot game that does not prompt the player to pay out a certain amount of game balls is executed. However, after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the first short open jackpot (per awakening) is executed, the awakening game state (game in which the release extension function operates) that makes the game value as the second long open jackpot different. State). More specifically, the second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probabilistic jackpot (wakeful gaming state) and enters a “promotion mode” in which both the so-called probabilistic function and the so-called open extension function are activated. It was decided. That is, when the second long open jackpot is won, it is first determined whether or not the open extension function is functioning (“elevation mode” or “retraction mode”) (step). S2410: Awakening determination means). If the open extension function is in a functioning state, it is determined that the player is in the awakening gaming state, and the operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 are operated is not the transition to the external normal gaming state. Transition to an external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state) that is changed to an operation mode that is more advantageous to the player than at the time of the initial (chance gaming state transition means). In the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state), the player is suggested to be in a gaming state different from the time when the lottery process is performed in the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state). Therefore, the lottery process for the jackpot was performed. In other words, when the first short open jackpot (awakening) is won (in this embodiment, even when the first long open jackpot is won), the second long open jackpot is a so-called probability variable jackpot (so-called probability variation function). And the so-called open extension function, and the game state that can be said to be an awakening gaming state, that is, the so-called awakening gaming state, in other words, the so-called probabilistic jackpot distribution rate increases. It was made to shift to the state that was given. In such a gaming state, since the so-called probability variation jackpot is more likely to be won than in the above-described external normal gaming state (normal gaming state) (in this sense, if the winning probability is only the so-called probability variation jackpot, the corresponding selection is made. It can also be said that the probability has been changed to a higher winning probability), and the player can enter such an awakening gaming state rather than simply winning per winning ball that prompts a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. The game will be aimed at winning the awakening with the main purpose of transition. As a result, the value of “a winning where the player is not prompted to pay out a fixed amount of game balls even though the jackpot is won” has been increased, and In addition to monotonous games such as how much can be won, new games can be provided. In addition, under the configuration in which the above-mentioned double standard lottery means is adopted, it is possible to suitably secure a value as a ball-out for encouraging a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. It is assumed that the winner of the jackpot will be targeted depending on the situation. For example, in a situation where there is no possession, it is possible to provide a new way to enjoy games such as aiming for winning per game first and then aiming for awakening after game balls are paid out.

  (11) When the third long open jackpot is won, it is first determined whether or not the open extension function is activated (for example, a chance game state such as “elevation mode”). Step S2412: Determination means). When it is determined that the release extension function is in an activated state (chance game state), prior to the transition to the external normal game state (normal game state), the game as the second long open big hit The awakening gaming state having a different value is shifted to a predetermined pullback period (“pullback mode”) (backward gaming state transition means). That is, in this case, for example, even if the third long open jackpot (per first normal play) is won in the “elevation mode”, a predetermined pullback after the jackpot game corresponding to the selection is performed. The period ("pullback mode") is a so-called probability change jackpot (a so-called probability fluctuation function and a so-called open extension function, which is the most valuable hit for the player), The lottery process for the jackpot is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than the external normal game state (normal game state). Therefore, when the “promotion mode” is terminated, the game interests are suitably suppressed from being suddenly reduced when winning (the third long open big hit) is won.

  (12) In the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state), the second long-opening jackpot is a hit distribution rate per unit (hereinafter referred to as normal) that triggers the transition to the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state) While functioning as the normal per unit so that the (per number of random numbers that trigger the transition to the external normal gaming state with respect to the random number width of the above-described design random number) becomes the highest per-share distribution ratio, the external advantageous gaming state ( In the chance game state), the hit distribution ratio (hereinafter referred to as “per chance”) that triggers the transition to the external advantageous gaming state (the chance to trigger the transition to the external advantageous gaming state with respect to the random number width of the above-described symbol random number) Used as a per-reinforcement functioning as per the above chance so that the number of random numbers of It was and. Thus, the rush probability (1/3) at the time of rushing (transition) to the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state) by winning the big hit in the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state), and the external advantageous gaming state ( The continuation probability (3/5) when re-entering (continuing) the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state) is greatly different due to the big win in the chance gaming state). The continuity of the chance gaming state that is advantageous to the player can be significantly increased while maintaining it favorably. That is, in this case, once the player enters the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state), the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state) is continued with a high continuation rate. Even without sacrificing, after entering the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state), a so-called jackpot ream can be expected strongly. In the above embodiment, the second long open jackpot is set to the normal according to the type of game state (external normal game state or external advantageous normal game state) when the second long open jackpot is won. Since it was decided whether to function as a winning or the above-mentioned chance, it will shift to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state) by winning the big hit in the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state) (rushing in) When differentiating the rush probability at the time of playing and the continuation probability at the time of transitioning (continuing) again to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state) by winning the jackpot in the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state), normal As a table for determining the hit distribution rate per hit and chance, the above-mentioned external normal gaming state (normal game letter) It is possible to obtain an excellent effect that it is not necessary to prepare a rush-only table that is used only when the player is in the game) or a continuation-only table that is used only when the player is in the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state). Become. In addition, “to shift (continue) again to the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state)” more strictly means that “the external advantageous gaming state (chance gaming state) is maintained until the next jackpot is won. This means “transition to the gaming state again (continuation)”, and this does not apply to the case of transitioning to the “retraction mode” as a result of winning when the transition to the external normal gaming state (normal gaming state) occurs.

  The present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  When the above-described effect control is performed so that the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to the variable display effect twice in the shortened variable display mode after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. 35: Fluctuation number 58), the time required for these effects may be different between the simulated first variation display effect and the simulated second variation display effect. For example, the time required for the first variable display effect to be simulated is “1500 ms” and the time required for the second variable display effect to be simulated is “2500 ms”. However, the time required for the first variable display effect may be longer.

  In the embodiment, when the reach effect is performed in the external advantageous game state (chance game state), the first probability that the normal effect control means performs the variable display effect (only one variable display effect). Is set to “0%”, and the second probability that a variation display effect (variable display effect over a plurality of times) is performed by the special effect control means is set to “100%” (step S15403: variation pattern table H5). However, when a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect or the like) with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is performed in the external advantageous game state (chance game state), the variable display effect is performed by the normal effect control means. If the second probability that the variable display effect is performed by the special effect control means is at least higher than the probability, the start port 600 despite the transition to the external advantageous game state (chance game state). , 602, 604, the decrease in the interest of the game when the probability of entering the game ball is not sufficiently improved is suppressed.

  In the embodiment described above, in the external advantageous gaming state, whenever the player is informed through the reach presentation that the jackpot has been won, the plurality of image designs are displayed a plurality of times prior to the execution of the reach presentation. A variable display effect (continuous effect) was made. However, when it is suggested to the player that the winner has been won through the reach presentation, prior to the execution of the reach presentation, the plurality of image designs may not necessarily be subjected to the variable display presentation (continuous presentation) multiple times. Good.

  In the above embodiment, the variable display effect for a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 in a plurality of columns (eg, three columns of “left column”, “center column”, and “right column”). This refers to the effect of variably displaying. The reach effect is a specific plurality of columns (“left column”) among the decorative symbols 1153 that are variably displayed in the above-described plurality of columns (“left column”, “center column”, “right column”). Only the decorative symbols 1153 variably displayed in the “right column” 2) are stopped and displayed on the same type of decorative symbols (single decorative symbols) 1153, and then in the remaining columns (center column). An effect until the decorative symbol 1153 that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the decorative symbols 1153 that are variably displayed in the remaining columns (center column) are stopped in the same type as the decorative symbols 1153 that are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is performed. Will come to be.

  ・ The probability that the winning probability A is adopted in the lottery process (special symbol lottery) in the external normal gaming state is a, and the probability that the winning probability B is adopted is b. Is within the range of “b / 2 ≦ a ≦ 2b” (preferably within the range of “b / 2 <a <2b”, more preferably within the range of “2b / 3 ≦ a ≦ 3b / 2”, More preferably, if the corresponding lottery process is performed with either the winning probability A or the winning probability B under the condition set in the range of “b ≦ a ≦ 3b / 2”), It can be said that “the double standard of the winning probability A and the winning probability B is adopted and the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with either the winning probability A or the winning probability B”.

  The situation where the player is suggested to be in the same gaming state when the lottery process is performed with the winning probability A and when the lottery process is performed with the winning probability B is that the lottery process for the jackpot is performed In addition to the situation (FIGS. 43 (a) to (c) and FIG. 44) in which the same effect mode is adopted as the effect mode in the above-described effect display device 115, when the lottery process for the jackpot is performed, the effect The situation where the same display mode is adopted as a display mode of a display which teaches a game state to a player outside display device 115 may be sufficient.

  In the RAM 713, when the RAM erase switch is turned on, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as the data indicating the winning probability of the jackpot and the current gaming state, are written with respective initial parameters. What is necessary is just a memory, and what is necessary is just the said data memory used for the some process concerning progress of a game.

  Next, a technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment and another example will be added below.

(Technical thought 1)
A game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball is driven toward the game area;
An opening and closing device capable of opening and closing between a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball driven toward the game area and an open state in which it is easier to receive a game ball than the closed state;
A start opening provided in the game area;
A movable member operable to increase the probability of entering the starting port of a game ball driven toward the game area;
In response to the game ball entering the start opening, a lottery process is performed on the first jackpot and the jackpot including the second jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot as the winning type. At the same time, in the lottery process, lottery means for temporarily placing the lottery process on hold;
Special game execution means for performing a jackpot game in which the opening / closing device is opened and closed when the jackpot is won in the lottery process performed by releasing the holding state;
When the first jackpot is won, as long as the second jackpot is not yet won in the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning is executed is changed to the normal game. First state control means for controlling the state;
When the second jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot game corresponding to the win is executed is longer than the time when the movable member is operated in the normal game state. Second state control means for controlling the chance gaming state to be changed in time;
A special symbol display in which special symbols are variably displayed so that the result of the lottery process performed by releasing the holding state can be recognized;
In addition to the special symbol display, an effect image display device having a display surface on which a plurality of image symbols are variably displayed so that a result of the lottery process is suggested to the player,
When the lottery process is performed, the display control means for performing effect control related to the variable display effect for the plurality of image symbols,
The display control means includes
In performing the effect control related to the variable display effect for the plurality of image symbols, the winning determination means for determining whether or not the jackpot is won in the lottery process, and the jackpot is not won by the winning determination means When it is determined, the effect control should be performed with either the first variable display effect or the second variable display effect that has a higher degree of expectation of winning the jackpot than the first variable display effect. When determining that the first variation display effect should be performed by the effect content determining means, and determining the number of lottery processes in the hold state, The first variation table is such that the time required for the variation display effect for the plurality of image symbols is shorter when the determined number of processes is larger than when the number of processes is small. When the normal variation execution means for effecting and the effect content determination means determine that the second variable display effect with high expectation of winning the jackpot is to be performed, the normal game state and the chance game state While determining which state is present, in the normal gaming state, the second variable display effect is always performed over a longer time than when it is determined that the first variable display effect should be performed. In the chance gaming state, special variation execution means that does not necessarily perform the second variation display effect over a longer time than when it is determined that the first variation display effect should be performed. Have
The normal variation executing means includes
When the number of lottery processes being held is large, the time required for the variable display effect for the plurality of image symbols is less than “½” when the number of lottery processes is small. A high-speed effect control execution means for performing the first variable display effect in a shortened variation display mode, and at least in the chance gaming state, the effect control is performed by the high-speed effect control execution means,
The special variation executing means includes
The expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the first variable display effect by performing the second variable display effect over a longer time than the time required for the first variable display effect. In addition to the first special change execution means suggested to the player,
A second special variation executing means for performing the second variable display effect in a time shorter than the time required for the first variable display effect; and in the chance gaming state, the first special variable execution. The effect is such that the second probability that the second variation display effect is performed by the second special variation execution means is higher than the first probability that the second variation display effect is performed by the means. Control.
The second special variation executing means is
Although the special symbol is variably displayed only once in the special symbol display after the special symbol is variably displayed, the plurality of image symbols are displayed in the shortened variation display mode. The first variation performed by the normal variation executing means when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is small by performing the effect control so that the variable display effect is performed multiple times at Although the time required for the display effect is shorter, the second variable display effect is performed while suggesting to the player that the winning degree for the jackpot is higher than the first variable display effect. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  That is, in the chance gaming state where the operation time when the movable member is operated is changed to the operation time longer than that in the normal gaming state (a state in which the so-called open extension function is enabled), the winning of the jackpot As the probability, a high probability advantageous to the player is adopted, and the lottery process related to the jackpot is often performed. However, as described above, even if the game is shifted to such a chance game state, if the player is unlucky, many lottery processes must be performed before the jackpot is won. In this case, in the effect image display device such as a liquid crystal display, if only the effect with a low expectation of winning the jackpot is repeatedly performed, the player is in an advantageous gaming state. No, it is unpleasant that such a low-expected performance is performed indifferently, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  Therefore, in such a chance game state, it is also possible to perform a variable display effect (such as a reach effect) that requires a long time at the same frequency as in the normal game state even though the jackpot is not won. It is done. However, in this case, the time required from the lottery process to the next lottery process cannot be shortened, and the player can fully benefit from the chance gaming state (high lottery efficiency, etc.). It becomes impossible to feel (enjoy). In particular, this is a problem that cannot be ignored for a player who wants to avoid a decrease in the number of possessed balls by temporarily stopping the game balls from being placed in the game area during the period in which the variable display effect is performed.

  That is, the above-mentioned movable member often operates only when a game ball is continuously driven into the game area, and the game ball that has been temporarily stopped after a variable display effect requiring a long time is performed. Even if the operation is resumed, a predetermined waiting time is required until the movable member operates. And during this waiting time, a player cannot enjoy the merit by having made the above-mentioned opening extension function effective. After that, when the movable member is operated, a variable display effect corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the start opening is performed, and the game ball is not driven again into the game area. Such a player can hardly enjoy the merits of the above-described opening extension function being effective.

  In this regard, in the configuration described above, when performing the first variable display effect with a low expectation of winning the jackpot in the chance game state, determining the number of lottery processes that are in the hold state. did. As a result, when the number of the lottery processes is large, the time required for the variable display effect for a plurality of image symbols is shortened to be less than “½” when the number of lottery processes is small. In the aspect, the first variation display effect is performed (normal variation execution means). As a result, the time required from the lottery process to the next lottery process is greatly reduced, and the above-described lottery efficiency in the chance gaming state can be appropriately improved. become.

  Then, after adopting such a shortened variation display mode, the first variation display effect is performed by performing the second variation display effect over a longer time than the time required for the first variation display effect. In addition to the first special variation execution means that suggests to the player that the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the performance, the second time is shorter than the time required for the first variation display effect. A second special variation execution means for performing a variable display effect; and in the chance gaming state, the first special variation execution means performs the second variable display effect more than a first probability that the second variable display effect is performed. The effect control is performed such that the second probability that the second variation display effect is performed by the second special variation executing means is higher.

  That is, when the above-described shortened variation display mode is adopted, even if a plurality of image designs are subjected to a variation display effect, for example, the first for the first time performed when the number of lottery processes is small. It is possible to shorten the time required for the variable display effect. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation is high by causing a plurality of image designs to be subjected to variable display effects in the shortened variable display mode. In this regard, the second special variation executing means is configured so that the special symbol display is variably displayed only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. The number of lottery processes in the on-hold state by performing the effect control so that the plurality of image symbols are subjected to a variable display effect over a plurality of times (for example, twice) in the shortened variable display mode. The expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the first variation display effect, while the time is shorter than the time required for the first variation display effect performed by the normal variation execution means when there is little The second variation display effect is performed while suggesting to the player. And, when the second variation display effect is performed in the chance game state, since the second special variation execution means is positively adopted, while performing the highly expected effect with high frequency, The time required from the time when the lottery process is performed until the next lottery process is performed can be greatly reduced, and the above-described lottery efficiency in the chance gaming state can be appropriately improved. Become.

  In addition, according to the second special variation execution means, even if the second variation display effect with high expectation for the jackpot is performed with the same frequency as when in the normal gaming state, The time required from the lottery process to the next lottery process can be reduced. For this reason, in the effect image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to avoid only the first variable display effect having a low expectation of winning the jackpot, thereby preventing the chance game state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed before the jackpot is won, the interest of the game is favorably maintained.

  Note that the variable display effect for a plurality of image symbols is, for example, an effect that displays a plurality of image symbols in a plurality of columns (for example, three columns of “left column”, “center column”, and “right column”). That means. In addition, the high expectation effect is an effect that the plurality of image symbols performed on the effect image display device are likely to stop in a display mode that suggests that the jackpot has been won. . For example, if an effect that is frequently used when a jackpot is won is used when the jackpot is not won, it becomes a highly anticipated effect.

(Technical thought 2)
The probability that it is determined that the effect control should be performed with the second variable display effect by the effect content determination means when in the normal gaming state, and the effect content determination means when in the chance game state. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the probability is determined to be the same as the probability of determining that the effect control should be performed with the second variable display effect.

  In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, according to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the second variable display effect having a high expectation for the jackpot is in the same level as when in the normal gaming state. Done at a frequency. For this reason, even if many lottery processes have to be performed before the jackpot is won, the interest of the game is suitably maintained. As described above, when the second variation display effect with high expectation is performed in the chance game state, the second special variation execution means is actively employed, and thus the second variation display is performed in this way. Even if the performance is performed at a high frequency, the above-described lottery efficiency in the chance game state can be appropriately improved. It should be noted that a probability that the effect control unit determines that the effect control should be performed with the second variable display effect when the effect content determination unit is in the normal gaming state is a, and the effect content determination is when the chance game state is in effect. When the probability that it is determined by the means that the effect control should be performed with the second variable display effect is b, it is preferable that these probabilities are set to “b / 2 <a <3b / 2”.

(Technical thought 3)
The second special variation executing means is configured to display a specific notice effect when performing the effect control so that the plurality of image symbols are subjected to a variable display effect multiple times in the shortened variable display mode. A gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2.

  In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the effect is such that the plurality of image symbols are subjected to a variable display effect a plurality of times in the shortened variable display mode. In order to control, a specific notice effect was displayed. For this reason, the player can more reliably detect that the second variable display effect having a high expectation for the jackpot is performed at an early stage, and the interest of the game is reduced. It will be suppressed.

(Technical thought 4)
In the chance gaming state, when the effect control is performed so that the plurality of image symbols are subjected to variable display effects during a period from when the special symbols are variably displayed until the stop display is performed, The gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the expectation that the jackpot is won is higher than when a plurality of image symbols are subjected to a variable display effect only once.

  In such a configuration, when the effect control is performed so that the plurality of image symbols are subjected to variable display effects a plurality of times from when the special symbols are variably displayed to when they are stopped, the jackpot is performed. Since the degree of expectation that is won is high, when the second variation display effect is performed by the second special variation execution means in the chance game state, the decrease in the interest of the game is more preferably suppressed. become.

(Technical thought 5)
When the reach effect as the variable display effect is performed in the chance game state, the effect control is performed so that the plurality of image symbols are subjected to the variable display effect a plurality of times prior to the execution of the reach effect. The gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4.

  In such a configuration, whenever the reach effect as the variable display effect is performed in the chance game state, the plurality of image symbols are subjected to the variable display effect a plurality of times prior to the execution of the reach effect. In the chance game state, when the second variation display effect is performed by the second special variation execution means, a decrease in the interest of the game is more preferably suppressed.

  Note that the reach effect is, for example, a specific plurality of columns (for example, “three columns of“ left column ”,“ center column ”, and“ right column ”) among a plurality of image symbols that are variably displayed. Only the image symbols that are variably displayed in the “left column” and “right column” are stopped and displayed in the same type of image symbol (single image symbol), and then are variably displayed in the remaining columns. This refers to the production until the displayed image symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the image symbols that are variably displayed in the remaining columns are stopped in the same type as the image symbols that are stopped and displayed, a bonus such as a big hit is given to the player. Become.

(Technical thought 6)
When the reach effect is performed in the chance gaming state, the effect control by the special effect control means is performed before the execution of the reach effect so that the plurality of image symbols are displayed in a variable manner multiple times. The gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 5.

  In such a configuration, whenever the reach effect as the variable display effect is performed in the chance game state, the plurality of image symbols are subjected to the variable display effect a plurality of times prior to the execution of the reach effect. When a high expectation effect is performed in the chance game state, the player has temporarily recognized that one variation display effect is performed as if it were a plurality of variation display effects. Even so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which obstruct | occluded the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a side view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. It is a front view of a door frame at the time of removing the member irradiated to LED among the members which constitute a speaker cover and a decoration member. It is a front view of the dish unit provided in the front of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the plate unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the plate unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the game board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main control board and a periphery control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd starting opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation pattern for every fluctuation pattern table set in a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a high disappointment fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern for every variation pattern table set in a high anticipation variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a low expectation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern for every variation pattern table set in a low expectation | forecast variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory small hit control process. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in an external normal game state (External normal game state A or external normal game state B). It is a figure which shows the image which shows the one aspect | mode of the production | presentation aspect which appears on an effect display apparatus when it exists in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in time limit mode. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus when it rushes into promotion mode after the long open jackpot game based on the 1st long open jackpot ends. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus when it rushes into promotion mode after the short open big hit game based on the 1st short open big hit ends. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in "retraction mode." It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode derived | led-out to an effect display apparatus, when winning a small hit or a short open big hit etc. in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode derived | led-out to an effect display apparatus, when winning a small hit or a short open big hit etc. in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device in an external advantageous game state. It is a timing chart which shows the said control mode when the production | presentation control concerning "extended extension | expansion and deviation deviation twice" is performed.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 6 Lower decoration board 6a Decoration cover board 7 Upper support bracket 8 Lower support bracket 20 Game area 20a Image display area 20b Ball flow lower area 24 Peripheral control board box 25 Main control Board box 30 Game board installation recess 32 Plate portion 33 Upper security double groove 34 Side security groove 35 Security recess 36 Hook opening 37 Projection rail 38 Launch rail 39 Prize ball payout stopper mechanism 40 Launcher mounting portion 40a Handle connection window 41 Fastening Holes 42, 43 Engaging groove 44 Rail connection member 46 Game board fixture 47 Upper shaft support bracket 48 Lower shaft support bracket 49 Shaft support side 50 Prize ball tank 51 Tank rail member 52 Ball passage unit 53 Ball payout device 54 Substrate unit 55 Dispensing control board box 56 External terminal board 57 Launching device 58 Cover body 60 Locking device 61 Door frame hook portion 62 Dar lock 70 Rear opening 78 Guide rail 80 LED display area 82 Normal symbol display 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold indicator 90 Second special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol Hold indicator 100 Door frame main body 101 Game window 102 Speaker opening 103 Prize ball passage opening 104 Opening 105 Cover opening 106 Lock hole 107 Slide unit mounting recess 108 Lever 110 Mounting opening 111 Engagement protrusion 112 Door frame protrusion 115 Production Display device 116 Attachment / detachment projection 118 Attachment / detachment locking portion 119 Display device control board box 120 Door lens unit 121 Lens base body 122 Upper reflector 123 Cathode tube support piece 125 Electrode support portion 127 Electrode cover 128a, 128b Speaker through hole 130a, 130b Side Reflector 131a, 131b Electrode support 132 Upper cold cathode tube 133 Rubber sleeves 134a, 134b Side cold cathode tubes 135a, 135b Rubber sleeve 136 Inverter board 137 LED board 138a, 138b LED board 140 Lens cover 141 Upper lens cover part 141c Leading lens part 142a, 142b side Front lens cover part 142c Leading lens part 143a, 143b Speaker mounting hole 144a, 144b Speaker 145a Speaker cone 146a, 146b Speaker cover 147a, 147b Mesh cover 148a, 148b Decoration member attachment area 149a, 149b Decoration member 151 Cover base plate 152 LED Substrate 154 Speaker frame 155 Decoration base plate 156 LED substrate 158 Decoration frame 159a, 159b Decoration plate 160 Reinforcement sheet metal 161 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 162 Axle support side Strong metal plate 163 Open side reinforcing metal plate 164 Lower side reinforcing metal plate 165 Upper bent protrusion piece 166 Lower bent protrusion piece 167 Characteristic bent protrusion piece 172 Shaft support side short bent protrusion piece 173 Open side outer bent protrusion piece 174 Open Side inner bent protrusion 175 Engagement opening 176 Hook cover 177 Prize ball passing port covering portion 178 Lower bent protrusion 179 Upper bent protrusion 180 Vertical bent protrusion 190 Glass unit 191 Unit frame 194 Stopping piece 195 Engagement Projection piece 199 Crime prevention projection plate part 200 Engagement groove 201 Glass plate 210 Crime prevention cover 211 Abutting recess 212 Pre-crime projection piece 213 Mounting elastic piece 214 Crime prevention rear piece 215 Crime prevention rear end projection piece 220 Mounting base 221 Prize ball passing Mouth opening 222 Unit mounting recess 223 Lid opening 224 Standing wall 226 Unit 227 Ball flight guide surface 230 Slide unit 231 Slide engagement / disengagement piece 240 Frame decoration relay Sub-board 241 Relay board cover 280 Cover body support cylinder 290 First side wall 291 Second side wall 292 Third side wall 293 Fourth side wall 294 Left rear wall 295 Upper rear wall 296 Right rear wall 300 Dish unit 301 Unit frame 302 Upper cover portion 302a Vertical cover portion 303 Front cover portion 304 Front decorative plate 305 Dish body upper surface opening portion 306 Operation button unit concave space portion 307 Decoration space portion 310 Space portion forming member 310a Connector 310b Wiring storage opening 311 Screw fixing portion 312 Engagement hole 313 First ball removal button 313a First ball removal button opening 314 Slide support members 315a, 315b Speaker openings 316a, 316b Speaker cover 317 Handle mounting hole 318 Handle unit 318a Rotation operation member 319 Engagement cam 320 2nd ball opening button opening 22 Ball discharge port 323 Opening for ball rental button unit 324 Ball rental unit 325 Fastener insertion hole 326 Operation button unit 327 Operation button 330 Lower speaker unit 331 Speaker box body 337 Ball passage passage 338 Guide rod 341a, 341b Speaker 360 Dish Body 361 Storage portion 362 Guide passage portion 364 Ball extraction passage portion 365 Slide valve 366 Rotating member 367 Rotating shaft 369 Spring 375 Ball extraction valve 383 Side opening lid 388 Ball extraction opening 395 Power supply substrate 400 Ball extraction link unit 401 Second ball extraction Button 407 Game panel 409 Game panel 409a Fitting hole 409b Long hole 409c Engagement step portion 409d Inner rail fixing hole 409e Opening portion 414 First link 419 Second link 430 Dish lid body 431 Prize ball contact box 432 Opening lid attachment window 433 43 after the ball passage Upper guide rod 435 Lower guide rod 436 Guide hole 462 Inner rail unit 463 Backflow prevention member 464 Rail security groove 465 Security projection 466 Positioning recess 467 Game board stopper 468 Speaker cutout 469 Fastening portion 471 Out port 472 Outer rail unit 473 Foul Port 476 Stopping portion 477 Connection passage portion 478 Passage notch portion 482 Guide rail 500 Big hit game opening / closing device 500a Big hit game big winning port 500b Big hit game big winning port opening / closing door 504 Panel back plate 504c Locking claw 505f Through hole 505g Opening receiving portion 505 Substrate holder 505e Fixed boss 508 Lamp drive substrate box 510 Back unit 514 Back box 514a Opening / detaching groove 518 Removable mechanism 520 Light-shaped decorative body 530 Wing-shaped decorative body 535 LED substrate 540 Panel holder 540a Engagement step portion 540b Through hole 540f Boss insertion hole 540c Engagement projection portion 540d Engagement claw portion 540e Projection pin 540g Mounting support portion 540h Retention recess 550 Second warp passage 554 Second warp outlet 560 Second stage 560a Front stage 560b Rear stage 562 Special receiving port 564 Normal receiving port 566 Second warp outlet side end 568 Second warp counter-exit side end 580 Rotating and distributing role 580a Magnetized portion 590 Disc-shaped role 591 Main body portion 592 Lower electrical ornament 594 Upper electrical decoration body 596 Middle electrical decoration body 600 1st starting opening 602 2nd starting opening 604 3rd starting opening 606 Movable piece 612 Passing gate 614 General winning opening 620 Center accessory 621 Opening 621a Transparent plate 622 Frame-shaped decorative body 630 Feather-shaped decorative body 632 Feather-shaped decorative body 632a Window portion 650 First warp passage 652 1 warp inlet 654 first warp outlet 658 warp guide piece 660 first stage 662 peak 664 valley 666 first warp outlet side end 668 first warp counter-exit side end 680 front component 680a opening 680c positioning fixing boss 680d Positioning projection 700 Main board 702 First special symbol display control means 704 Second special symbol display control means 710 Main control board 711 CPU
712 ROM
713 RAM
714 Small hit game execution means 715 Big hit game execution means 715a Long open big hit game execution means 715b Short open big hit game execution means 716 Normal symbol display control means 718 Normal symbol hold display control means 720 Discharge control board 722 CPU
724 ROM
726 RAM
730 Satisfaction full switch 736 Inner frame opening switch 738 Door opening switch 750 Panel relay terminal plate 754 Opening / closing device relay terminal plate 760 Gate sensor 762 General winning opening sensor 768 Normal symbol / special symbol display board 774 Normal electric accessory solenoid 776 Opening / closing device Count sensor 778 Big hit game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 780 First starting port sensor 782 Second starting port sensor 784 Third starting port sensor 800 Peripheral board 810 Peripheral control board 811 CPU
812 ROM
813 RAM
816 Display Device Control Board 818 Sound Source IC
819 ROM
832 CPU
834 RAM
836 ROM
838 VDP
839 Image ROM
842 Frame decoration lamp 850 Lamp drive board 852 Panel decoration lamp 853 Center decoration lamp 854 Discharge port detection sensor 900 First special symbol lottery means 902 First special symbol determination random number acquisition means 903 First special symbol hold counter 904 First special symbol hold counter 904 Symbol success / failure determination means 906 1st normal special figure determination table 907 2nd normal special figure determination table 908 1st probability variation special figure determination table 909 2nd probability variation special figure determination table 910 2nd special symbol lottery means 912 2nd special symbol validity determination Random number acquisition means 913 Second special symbol hold counter 914 Second special symbol success / failure determination means 920 Normal symbol lottery means 922 Normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 923 Normal symbol hold means 924 Normal symbol success / failure determination means 926 Normal common figure determination table 927 Open extension normal figure determination table 928 Movable Opening / closing control means 930 First special symbol hold display control means 932 Second special symbol hold display control means 934 Game state control means 938 Open / close operation control means 940 Hold order storage means 946 Command transmission means 950 Command reception means 960 Production lottery means 962 Control means 1000 First special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 Second special symbol corresponding symbol 1004 Timer 1150 Reserved display area 1151 First reserved display area 1151a First reserved memory display part 1151b Second reserved memory display part 1151c Third reserved Storage display unit 1151d Fourth on-hold storage display unit 1152 Second on-hold display area 1152a Fifth on-hold storage display unit 1152b Sixth on-hold storage display unit 1152c Seventh on-hold storage display unit 1152d Eight on-hold storage display unit 1153 Decorative design 1153a Left design row 1153 Medium symbol row 1153c right symbol row 5131 spruce determining random number storage area 5132 processing region

Claims (3)

A game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball is driven toward the game area;
An opening and closing device capable of opening and closing between a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball driven toward the game area and an open state in which it is easier to receive a game ball than the closed state;
A start opening provided in the game area;
A movable member operable to increase the probability of entering the starting port of a game ball driven toward the game area;
In response to the game ball entering the start opening, a lottery process is performed on the first jackpot and the jackpot including the second jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot as the winning type. At the same time, in the lottery process, lottery means for temporarily placing the lottery process on hold;
Special game execution means for performing a jackpot game in which the opening / closing device is opened and closed when the jackpot is won in the lottery process performed by releasing the holding state ;
When the first jackpot is won, the first state control means that can be controlled to the normal gaming state after the jackpot game is executed, triggered by the corresponding selection;
When the second jackpot is won, the action time when the movable member is operated after the jackpot game is executed with the selection as a trigger is set to a longer operation time than when in the normal gaming state A second state control means capable of controlling the chance gaming state to be changed;
A special symbol display in which special symbols are variably displayed so that the result of the lottery process performed by releasing the holding state can be recognized;
In addition to the special symbol display, an effect image display device having a display surface on which a plurality of image symbols are variably displayed so that a result of the lottery process is suggested to the player,
When the lottery process is performed, the display control means for performing effect control related to the variable display effect for the plurality of image symbols,
The display control means includes
In performing the effect control related to the variable display effect for the plurality of image symbols, the winning determination means for determining whether or not the jackpot is won in the lottery process, and the jackpot is not won by the winning determination means When it is determined, the effect control should be performed with either the first variable display effect or the second variable display effect that has a higher degree of expectation of winning the jackpot than the first variable display effect. Production content judgment means for judging whether or not
Wherein in any of the states of the normal game state and the chance game state, when it is determined that should perform the first variable display effect by the effect contents determination means, the lottery process that is the state of the pending Usually, the number of processes is determined, and the first variable display effect is performed so that the time required for the variable display effect for the plurality of image symbols is shortened when the determined number of processes is larger than when the number of processes is small. When the variation execution means and the effect content determination means determine that the second variable display effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is to be performed, the normal game state or the chance game state is set. And when the normal game state is always longer than when it is determined that the first variable display effect should be performed. While the second variation display effect is performed over time, in the chance gaming state, the second variation is not necessarily longer than when it is determined that the first variation display effect should be performed. A special variation execution means that does not always perform a display effect,
The normal variation executing means includes
When the number of lottery processes being held is large, the time required for the variable display effect for the plurality of image symbols is less than “½” when the number of lottery processes is small. A high-speed effect control execution means for performing the first variable display effect in the shortened variable display mode, and at least in the chance game state, when the number of lottery processes that are in the hold state is large, The effect control is performed by the high-speed effect control execution means,
The special variation executing means includes
The expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the first variable display effect by performing the second variable display effect over a longer time than the time required for the first variable display effect. First special variable execution means suggested to the player ; and
When the number of lottery processes that are put on hold is small, even though this indicates to the player that the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the first variable display effect 2nd special variation execution means for performing the second variation display effect in a time shorter than the time required for the first variation display effect performed by the normal variation execution means . Is the second probability that the second variation display effect is performed by the second special variation execution means than the first probability that the second variation display effect is performed by the first special variation execution means. The production control is performed so that the probability is higher,
The second special variation executing means is
In the special symbol display, although the time is shorter than the time required for the first variation display effect performed by the normal variation execution means when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is small, While the special symbol is variably displayed only once, in the effect image display device, the high-speed effect control execution means when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is large, the “1 / intends rows the effect control so that the plurality of image symbols with shortened variation display mode which is less than 2 "are variably displayed directing a plurality of times
The gaming machine which is characterized a call. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the lottery means acquires a random number based on a game ball entering the start opening, and performs the lottery process based on the acquired random number. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein an operation handle that can be operated by a player is provided, and a game ball is driven into the game area in accordance with an operation of the operation handle.